Transcripts
1. Class Overview: Hello, aspiring
web designers and freelancers. I am Pre Meta. Your guide on the
ultimate journey and web design with
Elementor Page Builder, where will unravel the secrets of web design without
the need for coding. In the next chapters,
you'll gain the freedom to work from anywhere as a
freelance web designer. Imagine mastering the art
of Elementor Pro crafting, visually stunning and
fully responsive websites. No code, just pure
creative power. You're diving deep into
the skills that sets you apart from the fundamentals
to advanced techniques. You'll charge more
for your work. Create websites
optimized for speed and loved by visitors and
search engines alike. Learn to build locally
without domain and craft custom menus
for seamless navigation. We'll also explore
all the major element or elements and leverage
the power of element, or AI, to speed up the workflow and design visually
stunning websites. This course is for anyone who is passionate about
building websites without the need for coding. Whether you dream of launching
a web design agency, starting your business,
becoming a freelancer, or if you simply want to learn everything in one
comprehensive course, this is your getaway to
success. But that's not all. Get ready to become
a pop up expert, lock dozens of pro
elementor widgets, and discover how to create impressive sites using the
free elementor features. Thank you for considering my elementor pro mastery course. There is absolutely no
coding knowledge needed, just a computer and
internet access. All tools and software used in this course are absolutely free to get started with ready to turn your passion
into a profession. Let's dive into
the exciting world of web design with
Elementor Pro.
2. WordPress Installation & Setup: One, welcome to this new course. I'm so excited that you're here. This course, literally
has the ability to change your life forever,
as it has for me. But you need to complete
this course entirely to gain its value
without further ado. Let's just start
with this lecture. First and foremost,
we need to install Zap and press in
our local system. Now there are another ways also to get started
with web press. Mainly to buy a hosting service, whether it be hostinger
or site drown. There are many different
hosting service providers, but I don't recommend suddenly start paying for it
while you are learning. Just because you can
always make use of your local system and make
it act like as a web server. So that's what we're
going to learn today to make sure that we install web press in our system and practice around
in our local system. Right. As you can see, I've opened up this Google
Chrome and I have been to the Zam official website and
in the download section I can see different versions to download for the
operating system. Now, depending on the type of system that you're
currently using, the installation process
might be a little different. Since I'm using a max system, the installation
process is going to be a little bit
complicated compared to the installation process and
windows because windows has a very streamlined
and linear system of installation and no
other additional things are required in terms of
windows installation. Whereas in system you might need to make few
changes here and there in terms of permissions or changing few files
here and there, but don't worry what it whatever system you're
currently using, it doesn't matter because
I'll be going through the steps while I'm
explaining this system, I'll be going through the steps for installation on Max system. But I also be guiding you all that what are the
things that you need to do for Windows or where exactly
you can skip the video from to you get started
with the next lecture. Since I'm using a Max System, I'm going to go
ahead and download the latest version of the Zap. Right now. Since I've
already installed Zap, I'm not going to
install it again. Now Zap, basically what it is, it has different kinds of servers and databases
like Apache, my QL, and all those
different kinds of things. And it essentially makes
your local system, your laptop or your
personal computer to act as a web server. Now, what is a web server? Web server is nothing
but a computer hardware. With computer software, it's
essentially computer itself. But the difference
is that it accepts TTP requests and its
variants like STP requests, like hypertext
transfer protocol and hypertext transfer
protocol, secure layer, whatever we work around with the websites and
web applications, we send out an STTP request. You must have seen
that whenever you try to search for any
website on a browser, on the URL section, although you'll be noticing
that the domain name itself, But once you click on it, you might see the S or ETP. In some scenarios
where a few websites doesn't have any
SSL certificate, then you might see STP over there followed by
colon and double. So that's what basically this
STP request basically mean. So you're going to make your
system as a web server, so it doesn't mean that
your system will be useless and it will just act like a web server
and you won't be able to do other things
that you used to do. It's basically just that
it will help you work around websites and web
applications requests. Right? Once you've
installed this Zamp, you don't have to do anything
else, just click on Next. If you're installing for Mac, then all you need to do
is just a Dragon drop and the Zampill get
installed in your system. If you're using Windows, then what you need to do is that you just need to
click on Next, Next, Next, followed by
browser location where you want to
install the files. I would recommend that
you install your Zamp in the C drive where your Windows
operating system resides, because it will make the
process streamlined. Otherwise, what you will face is that once you install
press and you're trying to log into
your dress website and make changes
in your website, you might find some
complications over there. That's the only reason
why I recommend installing zap in your drive. Once you have done
installing the zamp, you need to go over to the
Press.org slash downloads. Now there are two
websites of Wordpress. Official. First one is Tress.org which is
Wordpress organization, and the second is Wordpress.com Now I'm telling you all to go to Tress.org because
you're going to get access to the open
sources software. So that you can download this for
completely free of cost, and you can build your
own website from scratch. What happens if you go
to Wordpress.com Well, you'll get access to the
same press software. But Press on the other hand, is going to charge some money upfront on a monthly
subscription basis. Just so that they can host
the website on their server. So you are trying
to make changes directly on the server and
not in your local system. So that's the basic difference
between Dress.com and Wordpress.org Once you have gone to Dress.org slash
download section, you'll find this download button followed by the latest version, whatever press has come up with. Currently, the Wordpress
version is 6.4 0.2 and that's what I have downloaded on my system as you
can see over here. Now it will download a zip file. It's your responsibility
to extract them because the zip file
is a compressed file, and the uncompressed file, which has all these kinds of
different folders and files, is an uncompressed version and it occupies much more space. That's the only
reason why when you click on the download
button initially, the zip file gets downloaded. Now once you have extracted
from the zip file, you'll be left with this
folder and this file, and you need to actually
paste it in the zamp folder. So what I'll do is
I'll just go to the Applications
part. All right? I'll just go to
the Applications, And since we are using Mac, this is the step
that I'm following. If you're using a window system, what you need to do is just
go over to your C drive, browse your Am folder, and once you find the
zam folder inside that, you'll definitely find
the ST doc folder. Inside the ST doc folder, you need to move your
press folder over here. As simple as that, nothing else. Basically, what you're
telling the Zam to do is that Zap has all these kinds of different servers as we
talked about previously, Apache, my CQL, and all
those kinds of things. When you switch
on those servers, it will quickly recognize
your Wordpress website. Since we are going to work
around our local host, our local system, we want press to be in the Tdcs location all. Now what you need to do is
just go to the press folder, search for this file
called hyphen config. Hyphen sample dot Php file. Now this is a HP file. You need to make some
changes in the HP file. Now you don't need
to necessarily know coding and HP language. But few changes needs
to be done inside this file so that a database will be created
for your Wordpress website. I'll just click on this and I'll open this with a text
editor. All right. Now, depending on the kind of text editor softwares that
you have in your system, it could be a VS code or any other Notepad or any
other text editor software. You can open it with it. And then down to the part where you can find this DB name, DB user, and DB password, right? Db name is basically the
name of your database, DB user is the username
of your database, and DB password is the password
for your database, right? Each and every website
needs some kind of data, and that data will be
stored in a tabular format. And those tables, a
collection of tables, will form a database. Now that database
will be stored in, you can say in a SQL or no. Ql base Q is basically a
structured query language, and no Qual is non
structured query language like your Mongo DB. And we have different kinds
of database software that we use since uses a QL database
relational database. I would say it uses my okay, my QL in Apache. We need to give name
for this database. We are using a press website. We'll give this name as press. The name of the database
will be press and that's what I will enter within this single
inverted commas. The name for the
database has been given, followed by the database user, which I will enter it as root. Now, what does root mean? Root is basically account
in your local system, whether you're
using a max system or Windows or Linux system. Root will remain there. Root account allows access all the different
kinds of databases. When you're making use
of your Tress website, let's just say you have
different database tables, you have few images uploaded to one database for a
separate press website, and you have a separate
press website, a second Tress website where you would like to
access those files and those folders from the
previous press website. Access using the root user name, you will be able to fetch the data from
different databases. That's what DB user actually
mean and that's what the root account actually does,
followed by the password. You need to keep the
password as empty, so don't put anything
within this. When you are trying to
enter the DB password. You don't want to lock your
database with a password. You want the database to be accessible for each
and every website. Right? Once you're
done with this, just save this using control S, or you could just go over
here and click on Save. Right? I'll just
close this file. What I'll do is I'll just
make a copy of this file. I'll just make a copy over here. What I'll do is make
a copy and I'll paste it right inside this
folder as you can see. A copy of this conflict
file has been made, but I'll remove the copy
and sample words from it. All I'll be left with is
hyphen conflict dot Php file. That's what we want. Now once we have done that, what I'll do is I'll
open Amp and Manager SX. Since we are using
this Max system, I would click on ManaSx. If you're using a window system, all you need to do
is just click on Zam and start the three
servers that you have. I'll just enter the password since it requires
few permissions. Once I've entered the password, it will open up Sam folder. Wait a second. It
looks like I might have entered incorrect password. All right. Now let's wait for a moment to
open up the Samp. Yep. Now we can go
to manage servers. Now, once we go to
manage servers, we can see Pro, Apache Web
server and my databases. Now you need to
start all of them. Just click on the Start button, Start all button, and all three of the servers
will get started. In some situations, your FTPD or My databases are stopped even after clicking on
the Start All button. You know what you
need to do is just go to activity monitor
on your max system, Search for SCTPD,
Q and pro FTPD, and stop them all. All right? Only then you'll be able
to run all these things. Now we'll minimize this
for a moment, all right? It will keep on running
in the background. What are we going to do is
we'll go to our Google Chrome. And I'll click on a new
tab and I'll search for local host hypun PHP, my admin. All right. Php, my admin. I can just click on the drop. Okay. Drop basically
means that you've deleted that database
and I'll click on New Press and I'll
click on Create. All right. Database name
called as Wordpress has been created inside
my local host system. You don't need to
add any names or number of columns or
anything like that. You just need to go back and in your Ural
section instead of HV, my admin local host hyphen, Wordpress is what you
need to search for. All right. Give it some time. It will open up this
page and just click on the language that
you're comfortable working around with
your Wordpress website. Now, for most of us it would be English with the
United States version. So I'll just click on Continue. I will set the title of my
Wordpress website be anything. It could be your business
name, your portfolio name, whatever you intend to keep your website title as you
can enter it over here. But for now I will just keep
the site title as press. All right, username. It has to be admin. Now, this username
is different than the username that we
give for our database. For the database, we gave
the username as route, which means that
that account has access to all
different databases, whereas this admin
username is for the access of your particular
Wordpress website. Just like how you have
different Google accounts, your Gmail accounts, right? You have different usernames, different e mail IDs for it and different
password for it. It is not the same case with your phone password and phone username. I hope
you get the point. So here you give
the name as admin. Admin is not
necessarily that you need to keep your
username as admin, but what it basically means is that when you have
multiple usernames, you have multiple access to
your work press website. Yes, it is possible. In future, let's say you're delivering this
website to a client, you are acting as a
freelancer, right? And you want to deliver
this website to a client who can then later on manage few posts pages and upload few media
content from their end. Then you want to give them the editor access but
not the admin access. Admin access will give you access to all the
different plug ins, additional settings, and basically the entire
access of the website. Reason why we have a
username called as admin, which has control of
the entire website, and then we have
different usernames. So if you would like to continue with your name as the username, just remember that this
is your admin access. That means you have the entire
control of the website. Right, Followed by a password. Now, why do we
require a password? Since Wordpress is open source, there are a lot of chances of your website getting hacked. Now, that doesn't mean that
Wordpress is unsafe and you should not go ahead with
using the Wordpress CMS. No, it's absolutely false. I think about 43% of the Internet websites
are made using press. If there would have
been such a big flaw, then I don't think
that so many websites would have been
built using press. But the only point of
having a password is that since I talked about
just a few minutes back, that you can have
multiple access to this Wordpress website. You have a username
and a password. So if you want to give someone an editorial access and you want to keep
the admin access, you need to have a
username and a password. So I'll just give some
password and I will hide my password so
that even you know, you can't see a password that I use for my
Wordpress website. I'll just go ahead with the password that
I currently have. It doesn't matter that I
enter a week password still. I'll go ahead with some
difficult password just to give you guys that this is the safe practice
to follow, okay. All right, this is my
strong password and you don't ever check this box. This basically tells us that a search engine will
not view your website. If you tick mark this box. So this allows to discourage search engines
from indexing this site. And we don't want
that to happen. We want our website to get recognized by search
engines. But don't worry. Even if you click, don't
click on this option. Search engines currently
will never be able to index your website because that website is not hosted
out on the Internet. It is residing in
your local system and your local system
is acting like a web server temporarily as you are making
changes in your website. I hope you get the point. Once you've done
all these things, I'll click on the install,
but press button. The only reason why
I'm going ahead with all these different kinds of particular details
is because I don't want to skip out
any of the details and I don't want to
keep you guys in dark shadow that just get started with the
installation part. And once you've done that, get ahead with the main
purpose of the course. I don't want that to happen. If you guys are
running something, make sure that you learn each and every single piece
of thing, whatever. It's important for
you, it's important to learn each and
every bit of it. Now they are saying that you must provide an e mail address. I must have missed
entering the e mail. I guess previously the e
mail option was optional, but now I guess it is important. So let's just enter
my e mail address. Okay, I'm going to enter
my business e mail. And I'll click on
install, press. All right, so let's
just give it some time. All right, so press has been installed and
I'll click on login. I'll enter the username or I
can enter my e mail address. Right? And then I will
enter the password. I can click on remember
B so that every time I want to access
this press website hosted on my local server, I don't have to keep on
login over and over again, and you have the Tress
website shown on your screen. Now, this doesn't mean that we have completed
our entire step. No, this is just the beginning. Yeah. For Windows users, you're pretty much done. You can just skip this
lecture from now, but you can go over to the next lecture.
That's what I meant. But for the Mac users, you still have a few
things left to do. The only reason why
the Mac users have still some things left
to do is because Mac has different kinds of
security layers and different permissions for
each and every folder files and all those kinds of things. That's the only
reason why we have some changes needs to be made. I'll just close this
dress website for now. What I'll do, I'll go
to the Amp folder. This is the Amp folder, and I have an EDC folder. Inside this EDC folder, I will find httpd config file. Okay? I will find
this config file. Now, I need to edit this, I need to edit this file. Now I am editing this file. What's the purpose of it? So what happens is
that a tres website, just a blank tres website, will not get you to the point where you
actually want to build something in order to get
started with a theme builder, whether it be element
or elementor pro or DV, any of the theme
builders that you intend to learn and
make use of it. To install that plug in, you need to install few themes for your website
or some additional plugins, whether it be for
SEO purposes or for some other functions
that you might want to add for those reasons. To install plug ins, you need to make changes
in the conflict file. Even if you're trying to upload, let's say images or videos, Mac might not allow
you to do that. Or maybe we press might not get the full access to those elements that
you're trying to upload. For those reasons, we
are trying to make changes in this
particular conflict file. We'll search down to
the part where we find the user demon using
control F or command. If you can see, you can
say for Mac system, I just searched for
user demon. All right. So user demon and
group demon are two things that I
particularly have over here. Now, automatically it has recognized these
particular things. Okay, Why? So because Zap was already
installed in my system. As you are aware, I've already created a Wordpress
website in the past, actually, many
Wordpress websites in the past in this system itself. So initially, in your case, you might not find this user followed by my name
and this group staff. You'll only see this user
demon and group demon. Okay, you need to
comment these two lines. Now, what does comment mean? Comment means that the lines which your compiler will store, but it will not recognize it. It will not read and execute it. It will be there
for your reference, but not for the
compilers reference. Don't go in depth unless you
haven't ever come across some coding courses or any of my programming
languages courses, particularly Stag web
development course. Don't worry about it. Just keep in mind that
comment basically means that your software won't
understand this line of code. But you'll read it, won't execute it,
you'll just read it. It's just for your reference, we are not deleting this lines of code, we are just keeping it. All right, let me just
find here we have just add a pound symbol before
this sentence and it will comment the particular
line of code followed by, you need to write user with capital followed by this thing. Now in your case, how will you know what's the user
name of your system? Just open up
terminal by pressing the command and space key at the same time and just
search for terminal. Once you hit Enter, just
search for ID and Enter. Once you search for
ID, you'll find U, ID equals to 501 in my case, followed by a bracket inside which you'll find the user name. Okay? That's what
you need to copy and paste it over here
where you can see, okay, this particular line. In the next line you'll
need to add group with the capital followed by the
group name that you have. Again, open up terminal and you will find group right here. We have groups equal
to twentyen my case. And in the bracket I have staff. That's what I copy and
I paste it over here. Once you've done that, just save this file again by
command S or you can just click on Save by pressing the file
and click on Save. Okay, once you have done this, just close terminal and
close the config file. And the next thing that
you need to do is you just need to go back to
your press folder. We have this config file, okay, Not the sample, okay? Make sure that you're not
clicking the sample file. You're clicking the hyphen
config dot Php file, Open with text editor, software search down to the
part where you find config. Okay, Somewhere around. Okay, Once you press is basically WP underscore debug falls where you find
this, just below that. Add this particular
line of code I'll just enter and I will
write define bracket, open bracket followed
by a space single In S is file stream
underscore method, okay, Method, single
invented followed by a. Then we need to write again in single inverted
commas which is direct. What this means, it
basically allows your system to accept all the
different kinds of themes, your zip files, or
maybe images or videos, or audios or J files, any of the things
that you're trying to upload or make changes
around the database. You are giving the
permissions of read write method, that's
what you're doing. And just click on Save. I'll just click on File, and I will click on Save. Once you've done that,
close this again. In the content, just click on content and right
click on the content. Go to get info from Read Only. Make it read, write, make this also read, write,
which is everyone. Your username will be over here, which will be read,
write by default. The other two will be read only. You need to change that
permission to read and write. Do that for I think
all these folders, which is WP content,
includes admin, okay? Inside WP content you might also find plug in
themes and uploads. Do the same thing for all
these different folders and change the permissions only. Then you'll be able to
download different themes, you'll be able to access
different themes, you'll be able to delete these different
themes and so on. Okay, that's what
I'm doing over here. Once you have done that,
I think you'll be pretty much good to go and get
started with your course.
3. Theme Installation & Getting Started with Wordpress: What's up everyone?
Welcome back to the video. So in this video lecture,
I'll show you all how we can install a new theme
to a Wordpress website. Right here I am in the
home page of my website. And here you can find a few of the things that
are already present. Now, these are the things
that I did not add manually. It is because there is some
theme being used currently. Right at the top, you
can find this black bar where we have the Wordpress
logo, the Wordpress option. From where we can
navigate between different themes that
this website has, we can go back to our
Wordpress dashboard. We can erit this site by our Wordpress editor and make
use of the Gutenberg blogs. And then you have the
option to add comments. Right here in the plus icon, you can find post
media page user. With the help of this,
you can add a new post. It could be a blog post or maybe a product page
or a service page. You can add media and you
can even add a new page. Media basically
means that whether you want to upload a new image, GIF file or a video file page basically means that you're
trying to create a new page. Whether it could be a
home page about a page, contact page, service
page, and so on. Yes, you can add multiple users working on
the same press website. Right here, the rightmost
part of this black bar. You'll find your own profile. So what's the username
of your profile? Added profile options and
to log out from the option, right, there's a
search bar to search between different items
that are there right here. Let's go back to
dashboard right here. As you can see in this pane, we have home updates. Updates will show
all the updates that need to be updated. Basically about our plug ins, but right now we don't
have any plugins installed currently. Then we have the option
of post media pages, comments that we saw right
here at the top black bar. Then we have appearance section. Now inside this appearance
section, you'll find themes. Let's just go into
that and you'll find three themes already
installed within our website, which is 2024, 2020, 3.20, 22. Now, I did not
manually install them. It was already present when I installed my Wordpress website. All right, But we don't require
all three of them, even. We don't require
any one of them. We want a new theme. Let's just add a new theme. By clicking on that option, we can search between
different themes. I'm just going to
search for a block. Let's enter here, you'll find this option. Let's
click on Install. Now, while it is installing, you might be under
that assumption that once we click on install, the theme will be ready to use. No, you'll get one more
option to activate the theme. That means your Tress
website could have multiple themes installed
in your website, but only one could be
activated at the moment. Let's activate block at the
moment and we'll go back to our themes section and we'll deactivate and
delete all the other ones. Let's go to Theme Details. We have option to delete,
let's delete them. This one too, so that we can free up the space
for our website. You'll find that this is our block theme that
we have been using. Now, apart from block, there are many more themes which people use. Mainly Astra. But I'll just show in this course that why
block is required. All right, here in
bloc appearance, you'll find Bo appearing right here after we
installed the theme. Initially we just had themes and I guess we had
editor, right? Only these two options
were available. But right now we have
Widgets, menus Block. Let's go to Block and see
what are the options we get. Right here we have home
useful plug ins, change log. But as we scroll down in
this home option itself, you'll find an option to install the block
companion plug in. We'll also install this one. All right, what are
we going to do? We'll go back to
our menu option. All right. Now why do
we require a menu? So whenever you
line on a website, you'll always see
a top header or a navigation bar from which you can navigate between
different pages. Right? Whether it be
you're accessing from a mobile device or
a desktop screen, or a tablet device,
it doesn't matter. You'll always find
navigation bar at the top of your website. Fine, so something similar we want for this
website as well. So let's create a
name for this menu. So we can give something
like navbar or main menu. Let's just give navbar and I'm going to select header menu one. All right, now navbar, the name of our menu, will
be accessible only to us. That means the name
wouldn't be visible to the visitors who will
land on our website. I hope you get the point.
And let's create a menu. So once I create a menu, you'll find that there
are a few pages in the Viewll section,
home and sample page. But let's go to our page section to see which other
pages do we have. We have a sample page
and privacy policy page out of which only
sample is activated. That means it's
currently being used. And this one which is
a privacy policy page, it's in the draft more, that means it is not published. We don't want any
of these two pages, so let's just take both of them. And in the bulk actions
section, we can select, moved to trash, so that multiple items could
be deleted at once. Fine, so you can find
that no pages were found. So let's add a few pages by
clicking on that button, we can add a title to this page. So let's give this
something like a home page. Once we do this, you'll find in this right side knife bar pane that we have a page
and you have a block. This page will give you some summary that we'll
discuss later on. Then we have block, we have a block theme
icon here as well, which will allow you
to select between different page structures and select different design styles. All right, but we won't go right now in detail and cover each and everything that
we have right here, because we have planned for
other lectures as well. Let's click on Publish again. Fine. Let's add a new page here. You can see an option
to add a new page. We'll just click
over here and we'll add an about page, About page. I'll click on Publish
and Publish, fine. Let's add one more page and give it something
like contact. Let's add one more page by
clicking on this button, and I can give something
like Contact page. All right, contact
us. Let's publish. All right. Now once it
has been published, I'll go back to my
Tress dashboard and here you can find home
about and contact us. Let's go to menus
so that we can add three of these pages
in our navigation bar. All right, so appearance menus. And here we have our
a bar created, right? In the most recent section, you'll find home about
Contact us and View, you'll find two home pages. Now, why is that? Let
me just show you. In order to involve all of them, I can just select all and
add to the menu in the year. You'll find custom link
for this home and a page for this home page is something
that we created just now. Page will involve
all the other things that a web page requires. Whether it be a title,
the body of the page, featured image, the excerpt of a page and stuff like that. But for custom link, this is something
that you can add. Anything else, It
could be link to your Facebook page or Instagram
page and you can change the label to
something like follow my Facebook,
something like that. But right now we don't require any custom link to our menu. We can just remove this for now and we have about
contact and home. But this is not a
correct order or a structure to follow
for our navigation bar. Always, we should
display our home page, then about page, and
then the contact page. Let me just drag and
place it right here. Let's just say that you
also add one more page. It could be a services
or product page. Inside the services
you are offering, let's say your company, a
web design and SEO company. And you are offering
services like web design, SEO, and e commerce. Under or rather I should
say under services, you offer these three services. Let's just say under allowing
your users to click on the drop down menu and view About page About will
become sub item of home. Contact could also be
sub item of about, not of home because you
can see the structure. But let's just keep it
something like home, About, and contact all
three individual pages. Fine. And we can save the menu. If we go to our
Wordpress website and visit what exactly we get, you can find that this is, this is the title for our
Wordpress website. In the navigation bar or header here we have different
pages that we created, and it is perfectly aligned in a way that we wanted
it to display. Fine. Now, what is a theme? We actually installed
block C in our system, but why do we need it? What is a Wordpress theme? Every website that
you make using Wordpress needs a
specific Wordpress theme. Without getting very technical, I'll just touch upon few
things about Wordpress theme. Basically, it's a general style and layout of your
current website. Each Wordpress theme has different options in
the theme customizer, which we'll discuss
in just a moment. And these options can
range from customizing your header, which
we have right here. The home about us contact us. And the footer which we have at the bottomost part of our page. Building different block post controlling the width of
your website like blocks or a full width or
specific e commerce features like your
product layouts or different shop page layouts. Basically, all those
pre built things which we get in a
Wordpress theme, you can customize between them. So that's basically
about a Wordpress theme. So generally, it is controlling the layout and style of your
current Wordpress website. And they do not
build the website, so make yourself very clear. A page builder like
Elementor or DV, is required to build your
entire, your entire website. But Theme, on the other hand, is more of like an
outside shell for the page builders and a starting point to build
your Wordpress website. So you hope you get the point
about using and installing Wordpress theme into our system right here at the top bar. Earlier we did not find
an option to customize. We had an option to erit
the page but not customize. Currently we have the
customized option. So once we click on this
paint brush on the customize, you can find that our
press theme editor omits a which is
Bloxy theme editor. You can find the currently
activated theme is Blox. You can even change between
different themes depending on how many themes you have
installed in your press website. But for now, since
we have only one and we have removed other
themes into trash, so we have just one. Now, if I want to make the home page as the
current starting point, this one as the default page, whenever someone
lands on our website, then we should make
this as a default page. So how are we going
to go about it? Right here at the bottomst
part of our theme editor, you'll find sign identity menus, which adds homepage
settings and additional CSS. So let's go to
Homepage Settings. And here by default it will be selected,
your latest post. That means whatever post
or pages would be created, the latest, that will show
up as the default screen. But that is something
which we do not want. We want a static page. That means the thing
which you have selected will stay throughout, the website stays alive. So we'll select static page, select the home page as home, and we'll just publish. All right, so here we have the homepage and
we'll select it. We'll go back and you might find other options that we
will discuss later on. But for now, let's
just close this. And whenever someone
refreshes the website, here we have the
local host Wordpress and you'll find Home Page
as the default page. Again, coming back
to your dashboard, sometimes you might not find the access to the top
bar or the dashboard. It could be possible because you might
have not logged into your Wordpress website now in order to log in or
the UR specific URL. In order for you
to get started and log into your admin access, you need to type in local host forward slash the
name of your website. In our case, that is Wordpress. Then we have again
a forward slash and then you write
WP hyphen admin. It basically means that
Wordpress admin access. So there are multiple access
to your Wordpress website. There are editors,
there are subscribers, and there is admin and so on. So we want an admin
access so that we can get started with a Wordpress website and make changes around it. Now, before I end this lecture, I would just like to show a
few things here and there. Right here in the dashboard, you'll find settings
under Settings, you'll find other options as
well like general writing, reading, discussion media
per melings, and privacy. You need not worry about all the other
things that we have right now. Let's just focus on general and the other
things that we have. Right here is Parmelings
which I'll cover currently. Other things we'll cover
later on in this course. Because I feel right now
just to show and discuss, everything will feel
very overwhelming. I'll just go to the
general settings and here you'll find site title, which we have set to Wordpress. Now, while we were
installing our tres website, we set the title to
Wordpress later on. If you would like to change it, you can just come back to
settings under General Options, you can change the site title. Now right here, you'll
also find tag line. Now tagline is something
that is optional. So let's say you are
making a company website something like Nike. Now Nike has a tagline
like Just Do It. You can write, Just Do it in the tag line and
Nike insite title. Then you have the Wordpress
URL site address, RL, which you need not
worry about it currently. You also have admin
e mail address. Now, whatever e mail that you set while you are
installing your Wordpress, you set that to an
e mail address, which for some reason
you would like to change it so you can come back here and change the
e mail address. Right. Other things that we
have currently on this page, you need not worry about it. Once we scroll down, you'll find date, format, time, format. And this is something that would be important in a case where you are making new post blog
posts specifically. And it would have the date and time that it was published. You can just follow a format for time and whatever feels
comfortable to you. But whatever has been set currently is something that
most of the people use. Now taking a look over at the Permel section in
the Settings option, you'll find the permeling
structure as plain Dan name, month and name numeric post
Naman custom structure. What should we choose? Whatever
is selected right now. By default, is it the good
option to go with no? By default it will
set to Dan name. That means let's
just say you made you may up a block
post or product post. The ural structure would look
something like the year, the date, and the month followed
by the name of the post. Now this is something that you
should avoid completely at all cost because this won't
be good in terms of SEO. Now in terms of SEO, ural slug also plays a
very big role in it. If you could make your
ural slug as small as possible and only add what the entire page
or post is all about, that would be more than enough. Selecting post name is the
best option to choose for the permeling structure and you can save the changes right here. All right, so whatever the post name or the
page name would be, it would show up after
forward slash and it will display that's how your permeling
structure should be. I hope you guys
enjoy this lecture. In the next lecture,
I'll show you all how we can install and use
our page builder.
4. Elementor PRO Page Builder Installation: Guys, in this lecture we'll see how to install the element or
pro version in our system. As I said in the
previous lecture that we'll go ahead
and see how to build and design the home
page using Elementor plug in, which is a website builder. I said that, but I feel that
there are a few more things left to do before we jump right into
that particular thing. Right now, we'll see how to install this elementor plug in. And we'll also look into some basic settings
that elementor offers. Followed by we'll understand the container and
the flex box thing. All right, so as you can
see in my desktop screen, I have the elementor
pro zip file. Now elementor is a free plug in which has certain features which are completely
free to use. You do not need to enter your card details or pay even a single penny to access
all those free features. But it has few features
which are paid. And you need to pay them on a monthly
subscription fee basis. So Elementor Pro is paid. But since we are
learning and we are not going to be using this
for commercial purposes, I have the zip
file which will be accessible to you
all. All right? And that zip file,
you can use it for exploring the elementor
pro features. All right? I don't recommend at all to use any pirated software or I do not promote by
that, any sense. This is just a version
of Elementor Pro in a zip file format that is used widely for practicing
purposes, okay? So because I want you
guys to, you know, you on a very tight budget to learn new things and
all those kinds of things. That's the reason why I am providing these
files so that you can learn and explore
different things. Once you are actually building some websites
for commercial purposes, maybe later on, then
you can pay for the Elementor Pro
Subscription plan. For that reason, I
will be going ahead with this file and I'll
also show how to use it. In the dashboard section, you'll see we have an
option of plug ins. Once I hover around it, I see options of
install plug ins, add new plug ins, and
plug in file editor. Now install plug ins. Once you go over there,
it will show a list of different plug ins
which are currently installed in our press website. Since in our case our website
is pretty fresh and new, it doesn't have many
installed plug ins. All it will have is an anti spam plug in
and the hello dolly. This is just a basic plug in. I believe it was
installed because we had I guess 2024, 2023
theme builders. Right. That's why we
have this plug in. We can always delete
them later on, but right now let's
just keep it as it is. And we'll add a new
plug in right here. I'll click this option
and you can see we have an option of
many different plug ins. This section is acting like
your app store or playstore, just like how in an iphone
or an Android smartphone, we have the playstore
or the app store from where you can download
different applications. The same thing goes
with Wordpress, that you can download
many different plug ins. I'll just search for Elementor, Elementor, and I will
click over here. Once it shows up elementor,
I will install this. Now elementor, as I said, it has certain free features and it has certain
paid features. In order to use the pro version, we need to have the
elementor itself, the free version itself, so that pro and the elementor
can go hand in hand. Then we click on Activate. And we'll wait till it
activates this plug in. We can skip this. Okay? We can skip
the entire process. Once it is done, again, click on Skip, which is at the bottom right
corner of your screen. All right, now this
is how it will show. Now the latest feature
of Elementor has the AI tools as well
embedded in it. You can just describe
a few things here and there and it will
do most of the job. You don't have to even
do dragon drop thing. That's how elementor has
advanced in recent times. But let's just
skip this for now. Our main purpose of
this course is to explore the Elementor
and Elementor features. Forward press websites. We'll go back to our
dashboard right now. What you just saw was
the Elementor dashboard. Okay? Previously, as you can see at the top of the black bar, you'll have the
option of customized, which is for the edit section, the edit dashboard for the
theme that we are using. We have the edit page and then we have the edit
width elementor. This edit page is the word
press edit page option. This is for the theme that we
are using, which is block. This is for the elementor, which is a page builder that
we are currently using. We'll go back to our dashboard. And now we need to install our pro file, which
is elementor pro. We'll go back to
the plug ins again. We'll add a new plug in. At the top you'll find
Upload Plug In option. We just click over
here and we can find. Option to choose the file. Now you cannot dragon
rope the file over here. You just need to browse
the file and once it is located you can install and you need to activate the
Pro plug in as well. Now once you've done that, I think you're pretty much
installed this entire thing. Now as you can see, once the elementor pro
has been installed, it will prompt you
that a new version of elementor pro is available now. Please do not ever update
this elementor pro feature. You'll get in a
very big trouble. The only reason why I'm saying this is because let's just say you have built up a website which is hosted on
your local server, which I mean that your system, your laptop screen, right? So you have built a website using Elementor Pro and
all of a sudden you just decided to update
all the plugins which you have been using along
with Elementor Pro. Now what happens is that the
elementor pro feature files which are there in
the newer versions, all right, It could
be a debug files, it could be new features
that needs to be used. Those will obviously get appended with your
existing element or file. Now element or pro, as I
said, is a paid version. It requires a license key. You need to pay for a
monthly subscription fee. Right? It will be
linked to an account. Once it finds that your existing Elementor Pro
doesn't have a license key, you might get into
a very big trouble, causing you in
legal issues maybe, or your website
might just break. So don't ever update your Elementor Pro when
you're learning stuff. When you have paid for the
elementor pro version, go ahead and update it. All right, right now
we'll just stick with this part and we'll go to
the elementor settings. So as you can see, once I hover around elementor settings, I have tons and tons
of different options. For now, I'll just focus
on the tools part, or I should say Settings part. Okay, I'll focus on
both of these options. Let's just go to Settings
first and you'll find general integrations
advanced and Features. Let's go to Features part. Once I scroll down, I'll find we have an option
of inline font icons, so you need to change that
from default to active. Now what this essentially
means is that all the icons that you
will have in this website, icons are generally
in the SG format. Images are in generally P
or PNG or the Pec format. All right, P is the most
compressed and you know, it loads the fastest
among the other options. Other file extensions that
I just said right now, just like that, icons
also have an SG file. Now this SG file will be rendered without
loading the font. Awesome. And the icons library and its related CSS
files and fonts. That's what basically
this inline font icons basically mean. It means that your
performance of the website will boost
up significantly. Wordpress has got a
very bad reputation in terms of the performance
of the website, but I believe it's
up to the developers how they optimize their
website up to your point that it basically
leaves no difference compared to reactive website
or Wordpress website. Yeah, it depends
on the server that you have hosted your
website as well, but I think few
optimizations here. And there might
also help you speed up the performance
of your website. So that's what it will help you coming to the
grid container part. Now if you've learned CSS, HTML and Javascript, forget
about STL and Javascript. Also, just focus on CSS part. If you have ever explored
CSS ever in your life, you must have heard
or even learned about the concept of
containers, right? Containers and flex boxes. Elementor in recent times have added the feature of
a grid container. If you want to use that
container feature, click on the active and it will create a grid option
that you can add. Container option that you
can add in your press page. All right, we have the
edit top bar also. We have this particular option. We'll click on Active. We can click on Active. This is for the
AI version, okay. If you want to utilize
the AI feature, you should click on the Active. Now, since you're using
the elementor pro, the chance is that you might not be able to use
the AI version of it. But if you're just
going ahead with the element or free
version and you're not installing the file
which I'll be providing, you can pretty much activate
the AI version of it. All right, then we have
the landing pages listed elements and all different kinds of things which you
need to activate. And you can just keep us at the stable features by default. All right, once
you've done that, you can just click
on Save Changes. And I think we are pretty
much good to set up the entire element or website
for the next lecture.
5. Flexbox Container vs Inner Section - Bit confusing, but Don't Worry: Everyone, welcome back
to another video. In this particular
video lecture, we'll look into what is the difference between
the flex box container and the intersection
that we used to have in the element
or previous versions. I have created two websites. These are two dummy websites. The first one over here, which we can see has the
elementor old version. I think it has the
version 3.5 I believe. And earlier we used
to have intersection. And right now we have an
option of grids and container. You can see we have grid and container as the
layout of our website. So I'll just quickly
demonstrate what is the difference between
these two so that we can understand
how we can utilize the container feature in the
coming lectures earlier, what used to happen is that
as you can see over here, we have a heading text editor
and then we have a button. Now, all of all three elements in this particular intersection, in this particular
column or section are center aligned.
No problem with that. Let's just assume that
we would like to add another button to this
particular section. And we want to arrange this
button in such a way that this new button and this existing button are
both are on the same line. They both belong to
a same column, okay? And there has to be some kind of spacing between
these two elements. Is it possible? Let's
try to find out. So I'll just drag this button
and I will try to place it. So it gives me two options. I can either place it above this existing button
or below that. What if I place it
above this button? I can center line this, I can left a line,
I can write a line, or I can justify it so that it can take up the entire width. But that's not exactly
what we want, right? We want these two buttons to
appear in the same column. So how can we make that happen? Is it possible within
intersection? No, it's not. That's why we have concept
of containers and grids. So over here right now
in this newer version of elementor where we have the elementor pro
version as well. But mind it very well, the pro version and
the free version, both of them has the container. So even if you would like to continue with
the free version, you can still access the
container by default elementos. Newer version has removed the intersection concept
and have utilized the container as the layout of the default elementor style. So over here, if I try to add
another button inside this, still I have only two options. Either I can place
the button above this button or place the new button below
the existing button. All right, but how to place it in such a way that it
appears in the same column? Well, there comes the
concept of container. I can just place it right here. And you can see I have a
container. Acts like a box. If you have gone through my full stack web development course, where I have a separate section about CSS and the styling units, and the styling layouts and
all those kinds of things, then you might get familiar with the concept
over here as well. But if you have not gone through that web development course
or you have never even learned about CSS in the
past, there are no worries. Container is just like a box. In a box, you can
arrange elements or items center line or
stuff together above it. You can stack them up, just like that container acts like a box. Inside this box, I can place my existing button and I can
just duplicate this button. Okay, so you can see both of these buttons are
within this container. If I click on this container, you can see both these elements are present inside this box, which appears in the
gray border line. Even if I try to show
it as structure wise, there is a container
inside that container. We have these two buttons. Let's try to arrange
them in a way that both these elements
appear in the same. We can centerline
them and we can align the row in a
horizontal direction. That's how we can get this. Now let's just say that we
would like to add some more spacing between these two
buttons. How can we do that? Once I scroll down, I have the option of gaps. I can just increase
the gaps value. You can see that these buttons are getting separated apart. All right. I can even change it to something
like reversed. Let me just make it
zero instead of center. You can see this is how
it would look like. Let me just change this
to percentage. All right. There's some default
spacing between these two. This is how it would
look if the direction of this container is set
towards reversed. If it is horizontal,
it would be like this. Vertical, something like
this. And horizontal. Or I could say reverse. Let's just change
the name of this. Let's just say this is
button one, button one. And the same goes
for the next button. If I give something like
button two, button two, and if I change the container
layout instead of reverse, if I place it vertical, then you can see button
two is stacked up. Button one is at the bottom, that's how the entire spacing and the direction of the
container is set to. If you would like to justify the content, then you
can even do that. Now that wouldn't happen
with the vertical part. If I make it horizontal, I can center line it, I can have some
spacing between this. So that one button is in the left side and the other button is on
the right most side. That's how we have some space. A space around
basically means that the button will have spacing on the left and
the right hand side, just like that space
evenly will have an even spacing around all
the four directions. That's how you can
see some margin or padding is there at the
top and bottom right. So that's how this particular container layout actually works. Still, if you're
not clear, let me just show you with
another example. Just below this section, particular section that
we just worked around, we have another
section of reviews. Now this reviews is
just for an example. It's not like an exact reviews or testimonial section
that a website could have. But just to give an example or demonstrate the concept
of container layout, I've built something like this. So in our older element layout, we have this kind
of three reviews. Now let's just assume that we
would like to center align all the elements inside
this testimonial section. So how will I able to do it? So I can just click on the
column itself and I can vertically align it middle and horizontal,
alintized center. Even if I horizontally
align center, this particular element is
not being aligned center nor, nor this, and not this, all of them with respect
to the y axis. They are being aligned center, but not respect to the x axis. If you can understand
the graph clearly, this is my y axis. If I want to center the items
with respect to the y axis, ideally the element would
come somewhere over here. But if I want to,
this is my x axis. If I want to center align the element with
respect to the x axis, the element should lie
somewhere over here, right? That's how the things
should ideally work, but it's not working with
the intersection layout. If I go back to the
newer version of elementor and I can
click on the container, I can change the
container layout in a way that the direction is
supposed to be vertical. And we have center
aligned the content and justified the content center and the items are
aligned center. You can see with respect
to the y and x axis, the items are exactly
at the center. Just like this. That's how it was possible with the help
of our container layout. One last thing, The
container layout would be helpful in a scenario. Let's just say in an older version that you're
working around with, you just want to replace
the image in a way that the image that you had in the first column should
go to the third column. And the third
column image should go back to the first
column image place. All right, if you'd like
to do something like this, sometimes what might
happen in some errors, just by mistake, you
could have placed the image in a wrong column
or in a wrong section. That might even
break your website if you have designed
it properly. If you would like to do
something like this, then this is just dragon drop. It is very simple, you can just drag this around like this. But sometimes your particular element that you're
trying to re, arrange might go into another column, this
intersection itself. In order to prevent that happen, what the elementor version has that let's just say I
have this entire container. I have this entire container. If I just click
on the structure, a container has a
container. All right? What I basically am
trying to explain is we have a container, okay? This is an entire container. This particular
is one container, and this one is
particular container. And this one is also
another separate container. Instead of three columns, we have three containers. A box inside another box, it's like a nested box. Assume that we have a
large box of Amazon. Then we have a few
different boxes, Three boxes coming
from Best Buy, Walmart, or what other E Commerce
platform you could think of. Let's just assume any other
E commerce platform box. Those three boxes are
inside a big box. We would like to click on the
container, the parent box. We can rearrange
the direction of the elements of
these containers. You can see easily
the elements or the containers elements are basically these
containers in our case. So what I'm basically
trying to explain is that this particular column, which you might think that it is a column, but
it's a container. This one is a container,
this one is a container. So although these
are containers, but they are part
of a big container, so I can just call it as
elements for now, right? So, I've just basically tried to reverse those containers in a way that we could rearrange in a way that we
expected it to behave. So that's how our Flexbox
container actually worked. I know some people
who might be watching this video might
find the concept of containers very confusing. But don't make it
very complicated, just think of it like
a box inside a box. A box has a flexibility to place items at any given direction with respect to y and x axis whenever you're trying to
build around something, Whenever you're trying
to arrange items, always place an image of a graph which has
two dimensional graph. X and y axis. Don't go much
complicated with the z axis. Also, we are not working
around with a three D website, we are just working around
the two D version of it. Right now, you just
have a Y and X axis. If you want to place
few items center with respect to the X
axis and with respect to the Y axis, how
it would behave. So that behavior, it
would pretty much replicate what you
expected when you apply the concept of containers. That wasn't the same case with
the intersection concept. Containers are very much handy. And containers used
to exist even before Elementor invented this
in their newer versions. Because CSS by default had the
concept of containers that dives and justification of justified content and all
those kinds of things. I think if you're
familiar with the CSS, then it wouldn't be a problem
understanding this concept. But if you're new to the
web development world, don't get overwhelmed by
this concept of containers. Just re watch this video point, you don't find it comfortable
working around it. I always say that whenever
you're following any lecture, try to practically
do it by your own so that you'll understand clearly that how it actually worked. All right, I hope this video helped you guys understand
the concept of containers. In the next video lecture, we'll see how to
build a home page of a website using the
elementor page builder.
6. Learn Elementor elements while building Home Page: All right, I hope you guys are excited as much as I am
because in this video we'll be building
an entire home page from scratch using the
element or Page builder. Now earlier when we did not have this plug in at
the top black bar, we did not see this option to erit with element
or Page Builder. But now we can right here I have a new page which
is called element or 58. In this page itself, we
are going to build and design an entire home
page from scratch. Now since this has the
writer inside the page, we would like to make
this page from scratch. Let's just erit this page
by going right here. What are we going
to do? We'll remove the page name right here. See we have page a
block option and this block app option block
is what I'm going to click. I will click on the page title. Right here in the page title. I have an option of inherit
custom and disabled. I'll just click on disabled
and I will save this. Once I click on this, I
will publish this page. If I view my page,
let's see what happens. Do I get to see the
page title right here? No page title will be
there in the ural section, but it won't be present
inside our web page. At the top, what you can see is the header that we
created earlier. All right, let's just
start by building the page using the elementor.
I'll just click right here and this is how the interface of the element or page
builder will look like. In the left pane, you'll
see the different plug ins. And I should not say plug ins but rather I should
say elements in the basic. The layout you can see we
have a container layout, we have a Pro layout, we have a layout option.
Then we have Pro. Here we have all the
pro elements which are available since we have
installed our Pro plug in. But I think this video would be good enough
for those who are just starting out and who have
not purchased the plug in. All right, what are
we going to do? First and foremost, each and every web page requires
a hero section. First, we'll create
a hero section by clicking right here, which is the plus icon. And I will get to choose the different flex
box options here. I have to choose the
structure of my flex box. I'm going to go ahead with
the two columns sections. And what are we going to do? We'll keep an
background overlay of black color and we'll add
some elements inside that. All right, here you can
see the pink layout, which is formed right here, is the entire container, the entire Flexbox
layout inside which we have two containers.
You can see right here. All right, now in the left pane, you'll find three
different options, the layout, the
style, and advanced. In the layout tab, you'll find different options to choose and erit the
container width direction in which your
container works around and the gaps that you
can leave between the elements or the
containers that you have. All right, so I hope you get
the point about layout part. Then coming to the style option, we have an option to choose between different
backgrounds that we have. How the background
should look like, when normally it appears, and what should happen when the cursor points
toward that element. That is the hover
effect that happens. You might want to add some more detailing or some more
styling elements. When the user brings their cursor towards
a particular element, you can change those effects and settings for
the hoor effect. Coming to the background type, we'll find different options. We have the classic gradient video and slide show. Classic basically means that a simple color will be
applied in the background. Or a gradient effect
is something where two or more colors can be
used in a different formats, like a linear, radial and so on. If you've gone through
my Figma I course, you must have learned
about different kinds of color gradients and how we can work around building
different background layouts. Something similar
can be applied right here in press website
after background, we have an option of
background overlay. That means if you're trying
to create an overlay effect your background, you
can even do that. Then you have an option to
add border to the elements. You can give a border type, You can add about radius, you can add a shaped divider. In the advanced section, you'll find an option to play around with the
margin and padding. Now we'll touch upon this topic later on about what is
margin, what is padding? But essentially what
it basically means is that in this lecture
itself, by the way, what essentially margin and
padding allows the users to do is that it leaves some
spacing between your elements. Hope you get the point
about margin and padding. Then you have an option to align the elements and in which order, particularly you want to
arrange your items or elements. Then you have an option
to place the sizing, play around with the position and, you know, maybe increase
or decrease the Z index. So we'll cover each
and every topic. Don't worry about
it, but for now, what are we going to do inside
this particular flex box? We'll add one background color. Coming to the style option, we have Background normal, We'll click on Classic, and we'll choose the
color by default. You can see none of the
color has been applied. It's just taking up the
default color which is there. And the color of
the background for this particular flex
box is transparent. Whenever you find
something like this, it is basically meaning that it's a transparent
background. All right, so we don't want a transparent background rather we want a black background. Let's just click on the color, and we'll drag if a slider
to the part of bottom left, or maybe even bottom right. You can focus, bottom
left is black. You can even look
at the hex code when the number is all zero, it basically means
that it's black. When the numbers are all, it basically means it's white. We can just drag either
left or towards right and we'll get a black
background effect. All right. I can even choose between
different colors by moving my slider towards right and side, the
warmest colors. And towards the left, it will
be the most cool colors. All right, here you can see if you play around
this second slider, it basically means that you're playing with the
transparency of your color. The more you move towards
slider to the left, it basically means that your
color is being transparent. And the more you move
towards right inside, it basically means that
the color is being opaque or non transparent. I
hope to get the point. Let's just make it
somewhat black, but not exactly black. I'm just going to
keep it something about this shade. All right? I like this color, so we'll just keep it like this. Now, coming to this image part, we don't want to add
any image as of now, but we'll look into later on. All right, now let's add a
few elements inside this. What I'll do, I'll just
click on this container. I'll just click on
this container. I'll go back to this
particular button, which will allow me to browse between different
elements that we have. And what I'll do is I'll
add one text editor. Text editor basically means that you're adding
text inside it. It does not have an h1h2 tag, rather it has a paragraph tag. If you've gone through a full stack web
development course, or you have some idea
about HTML and CSS, you must have learned about
different tags in HTML. There are many tags like h1h6, then you have a tag tag or paragraph tag essentially
contains the entire content, body content of your text. Whereas from h1h6 contains
all the heading tags, which basically represent what your body content is all about. Right now we're going to add something like business name. Right now you can
see the color of this font is dark
blue, I would say. But it's not going well with
the black background color. Obviously, we want
contrasting effect to appear when the color of
the background is black. Then obviously, we
want the color of the font to be
contrasting to it. That means it should
have some lighter shade, or a lighter color wouldn't be best to give it a white color. Let's go to this. You can see Textedor right here. I'll click on Style. And then in the
text color section, I'll drag my cursor
towards the top left part, and you can see my color
has changed to white. All right. You can even play around the different
alignments of your text. Currently, it is left a line, but it is not selected. By default, the text
would be left a line. Then you have a central line, right a line and the
justified content. But let's just keep it. With default settings, we can
even change the typography. Typography, basically you are allowed to choose between
different font families. Here you have a few built in fonts and it even is
connected with Google Fonts. If I search for
something like poppins, you can see it's a Google font. And it can be
applied right here. But if you would like to
add some custom fonts, you'll see later on
in this course how you can add them
into your website. Now you can even play around
the different font sizes. Currently, it has some
default size applied to it. You can even move
the slider to see how it would look
like with 15 pixels. 15 pixels of your text leor. Or I would just keep it. 2020 looks good. All right. Now you can even find
different units. Currently it has in pixels unit, you'll find EM, Ram, viewport width and so on. So I won't be covering all the units that
we have right here. But I guess in my full stack
web development course, I've covered all of
these different units in the CSS section entirely. I hope if you would like to get involved with
these things in detail, you should definitely
check out those courses. All right, then we
have font weight. Font weight essentially
means that whether you want to keep your font with some a bold or keep the weight of
the font to be light. If I keep this
something like light, you'll find that the font
itself becomes very thin. If I keep it something bold, then you can find that the
text is very bold and bright. Let's just keep it with bold. We can even change it out
with semi bold or so, but I would just like
to keep it with bold. Now you have an option
to transform your text. Now let's just say
for some case, I added a text which has a letter and all
words in lower case, but I would like to
change it to upper case. Then you can see
all the letters of my text has been
transformed to upper case. If I make it to lower case, then all the letters will be
transformed to lower case. I have an option to capitalize. That basically means that
after each and every word, the first letter
of the next word will be transformed
to upper case. Whereas the list
of the letters in that same word will be
transformed to lower case. That's what capitalized
transformation actually mean. And then you have an
option to normalize, which basically means that
whatever text you have pasted, it will bring that
settings back to default. Then you have an option
to style your element. That means whether
you want to keep your font style normal,
italic or oblic. I hope you get the point about working around the
transform and style. If you have worked around any of the text editing software like Microsoft Word
or Google Docs, obviously these
kinds of settings are very simple to
understand and work around. All right, lastly
we have decoration, which basically means that would you like to add an
underline to your text? Would you like to add an
over line to your text? Would you like to give
line through a text or may be none of the
above options. So let's just keep it
with default which means none of the options will
be applied for decoration. And then you have an
option of line height. Now since we have just two words appearing in the same line, we don't have multiple lines, we don't have a lot of
covering multiple lines. Line height basically means that whenever you have multiple words or such a long text that it
covers in multiple lines, then the spacing between these
lines will be increased. Right? You have line height,
you have letter spacing. That means spacing between
each and every letters. If I change it to
something like, let's just say three, you can see how the text
has transformed. It looks different than how it used to look earlier, right? You also have word spacing. That means spacing
between two or more words will be played
around with. Right? Then you have an option
to add a text shadow, which we won't be
covering right now. But essentially what you
can do is you can add a blur or maybe add some
shadow to your text. That effect would be cool in a case where you have
a lighter background. But right now we have
a darker background. I would not like to
touch upon this area. Fine, let's add a new element. I'm going to click on this icon, and I will drag and drop my heading right inside
this container itself. If I place it right in the left inside or
in the right inside, for some case you might
be not able to add your new element inside
the container and it might get added outside
your container. In that case, how would
you rearrange them in such a way that it appears right inside that
container? Simple. By clicking on the entire
container section, you have an option
to choose between Navigator or sometimes you
might even find Structure. You can just click right here. And here you'll find
different options like that. How the heading would appear, contain text editor and so on. All the elements
that you have in the entire website will
show up right here. All right, I can just drag my heading right inside this container where
I have a text editor. You can find text editor appears above my heading and the heading appears
below text editor. If you would like to rearrange the settings inside
the container, you can just drag and drop right here inside the
container itself. You can even do
that inside this. Fine, I'll just
change the text to something like making payments or I would just
say something like secure payment option or let's
just add a few more words. Something like making payments has never been easy. All right. What I'll do, I'll just change the font color, First of all by
going to the style, changing the text
color to white, changing the
typography to poppins, because we would
like to maintain the consistency throughout
our entire website. Then we're going to add,
or rather I should say, we'll transform this text
to something capitalize. All right, now what
are we going to do? We'll increase the
size of this font. We would like to make this
something like 70 pixels. That looks good. What are we going to do inside
this container itself? Below our heading, we'll
add one more text editor. Basically, we're
creating a website for an application which works similar to Apple Pay or N More. It's like a promotional
website for an application which allows
people to make payments. This is just like a
brief idea about what the website essentially explains and what are we
exactly trying to do. All right, so here
we have simple text. Again, we can just change around the font style and change
the color of the text. But the easy way to work around this and
pasting the styling would be just to click on any of the other elements which you
would like to replicate. Right here, I can just
click on this text. I right click on this element. I can copy, or I have a
shortcut to choose which is command C. I can just do that right here in
this element itself. I can right click and
paste the styling. You can even see
a short cut right here which is
command shift and V, I can do it right here. You can see that it has applied the styling
for the H one tag, which we do not want to apply, we'll just undo by holding
command and Z patterns. All right, let's just
go to the style tag. Change the color to white. We can change the font
family to poppins. All right, and this is
the text that we have. Now between this name
that we have right here, text editor, and our heading, you can see there's
some gap right here. It would be better if we could
make use of few elements inside our elementor and make some cool
changes around it. All right, so we can just add a divider between
our texteditor and Heading that we have some kind of division
between these two elements. Right here we have style now we'll change the color
to something like green. I'll just move my slider towards something
like green color. I would like to make use of a cool green color instead
of a very bright green. I think this green
color would look good. Let me just move my cursor
to the topmost part, and this is the
color of my divider. Now, I can even change
the weight of my divider. That means how fat I
want my divider to be, currently it is set to one. I can just make this to something like
let's just say three. Or maybe even 2.5
would look good. All right, now you can
find spacing between them. Let's just drop it down to the least possible gap
between this and this. Now you can find that
although the business name, the text editor ends right here, but our divider, you know, it occupies the entire width, We do not want that to happen. In that case, what can we do? We should make sure
that our divider is selected in the element
or editing pane. By going to the content part, you'll find whether you want to play around with the
width of it or not. Currently it is set to
100% That means occupy the max possible width
according to your container. Whatever width is there
of your container, just take up the entire space. That is what 100%
actually means. But we would like to drop
it down to something around 40% That looks perfect. Now, what are we
going to do next? We want to add two buttons
below this text, right? We would like to add two
buttons below this text, such that the user can learn more about our application or
even download the app. Let's just bring our
button right below this. Now we would like to make
use of two buttons and both of these button
should appear in line. That means both of
the buttons should be appearing in the same line and there should not be two rows. All right, what can
we do in that case? First and foremost,
let's try to see what other elements
that we can play around in the editing
style of button. Whenever you have a button, you can change the
type of the button, whether you want
it to be default. That means it will have a gray background color
Have Info button. That means it will by default have some set
settings around it. Styling settings like
blue background color. If you have success, it
will be green in color. If it's warning, it will
be orange in color, and if it's danger, it
will be red in color. Let's just keep it default, you can change the text, something like learn more. All right, if you want to
add some link to the text, what will happen is whenever the user clicks on this button, the user will be redirected to a page or part of a page
within this web page itself. You can make things
work around it. You have an option to play around with the
size of the button, whether you want it to be small, medium, large, extra large. But I think this size of
the button is good enough. All right, going to
the style option, let's change the font
family to poppins, which we have applied for other fonts and other
elements as well. We'll change the color of
the button to be green, which is the exact same
color of our divider. What are we going
to do over here? We'll just copy color hex
code for this divider. We'll go to this button in
the color of the button, I'm going to paste right here. You can find the color of
this has been changed, but I would like to make
this a little bit darker. I think this color
looks good enough. And this is the same
color that I will apply right here in
divider section as well. Let me just paste this color. All right, this looks
good, I think, yeah. Now, what are we
going to do? We have an option to add a
border radius as well. You'll see for the button, what does border radius
actually mean. Right now you can see the
button has some kind of a sharp edge in all
the four corners. Top left, top right, bottom, left, bottom right, correct. But let's just say for
a scenario where we would like to add
circular buttons or rounded edges for our button. We can just play around this and we can add
to something like, let's just say around 50. Then you can find the button
appears to be circular, but let's just keep it
something like ten. I think ten would look good. Or maybe even five in that case. Five looks really great. All right, now what
are we going to do? We will just duplicate this. Now you will find
both the buttons appearing in a stack format. They both are like this, one appears at the top, the
other appears at the bottom. But we want both
of these buttons appear in line in that case. If you have gone through the previous videos where
we have discussed in detail about what
is flex box and what used to be earlier
which is intersection, then you'll obviously know that we need to add
a container. And Align the items in
a way that both of these buttons appear
in the same line. Let's just drag and
drop the buttons inside the container just to make sure that both the buttons
appear in the same. We can just right click on this container,
choose Navigator. Here we have a container inside which we have two
buttons. All right. Now we'll change the color of the button and text to
something like download now. All right. Download now. Let me just remove now, we'll just keep it
download. Fine. What I would like is
that let's just make the color of this found to
be default, which is gray. All right, now let me change this direction of the
container to be horizontal. So now you can see
both the buttons appear something like this. Now, this is exactly
what we wanted. All right, now in
the next container, what do we want to add? We want to add an image of our application
right inside this, we are going to drag and
drop the image element. All right. Elementary
is very easy. Any page builders in Wordpress are very easy to
understand and learn. All right, here we can
just choose Image. Now you have an option to upload the files from your folder, or you can browse between different elements that
you have already uploaded. Right here, you'll find
different elements and images that I've already
uploaded right here. Or you might even enter a URL of an image which you
found from Google Images. For now, I'll just browse through different images
that I have right here. I'll just choose this image, and I'll select it right here. Now you can see this is the image that we
have right here. Now I have an option to play around the image settings
like change the width, max weight, height, and so on. And you might even find this option called CSS
filters right here. Now if I click on this, I can choose between
different options to play around the
blurring of the image. Maybe play around
brightness of the image. Currently it is set 200. If I move my slider
towards left, you can see the
image turns darker. If I move my slider
towards right, it changes the brightness of the image to
be more brighter. That means the image
will be more white. You can even play around
the contrast saturation. It basically means
that you don't have to necessarily make use of any image editing
tool in order to make some basic changes
around your image. All right. I hope you guys have some basic understanding about how the elements in
elementary page builder work. But there is still one
thing left to do before we, you are done with our
building, our hero section, which is to click
on this container and you'll find the elements
are appearing in such a way that they're sticking
towards the top part and they are not
appearing in the center. While just clicking
on this container, you'll find that
the direction of the container is
set to vertical. Now that's exactly how we want, but we also want to
justify the content to center so that the contents and the image appear such that the height of the
containers are justified. I hope you can see the
entire hero section is filled up properly. All right, now you might
even find that there is some spacing between your
header and hero section, which we'll see
how we can do that with the help of
margin and padding. All right, now before I move
on with another section, you might see that
there has been some change in the layout of
our element or page builder. You can see right
here at the top, we can see the name of our page. Then we have the
different icons, the desktop icon, the
tablet and mobile icon. Then you have the post
settings right here. How did that change happen? Also in the layout section, you can see earlier we
did not have the grid, We just had container for that. What I did, I just went back
to my Wordpress dashboard. Right here. I just went
to Elementor Settings. Inside Settings,
I have a features in the list of features. What I did initially, this grid container feature
was set to default. I changed that to active
in the editor top bar. I also changed that
from default to active. All right, you can also see
an option to build with AI. I also selected from default to active and I made the changes. And I saved it right here. That's the reason why we saw a different layout
for our elementor. Let's go back to pages, all pages elementor 58 and we'll edit Edit with elementor. All right, now before we create a new section inside
the hero section itself, let's add a new image in the background so that
there's some an effect. I would like to add an image right here in this container. By going to the style,
you'll find an image. I will select an image
which is called as line for the image that
I have right here. And you can see there
is a curved line going below the hero section. Now what I'll do is I'll
just change the position of the image such that it
appears in the left side. All right, before that I would like to change
the display size. You can see display sizes
set to default currently. But we can change it to
something like contain. If I change this to contain, you can see the
lines are appearing. Earlier we just
saw a single line, a single curved line going
below the hero section, and now we can see
multiple lines. Now, how did that
change exactly happen? The image itself
contained many different, in many different curved lines. But we only saw the single line going
across our hero section. That's because the width and height of our hero section
is such that it only covered that part of the image where the line was passing through By changing the display size
of our image to contain. It allows, you can
see right here, I have opened up the
documentation for element or right here in the
different sizes that we have. You can see cover contain, we have set this to, you can see contain the size
is set to contain. What does it mean
the entire image will be fit within the element. Obviously, the
dimensions of the image and the dimensions
of your section of your entire flex box would
not be the same every time. In that case, you
would like that the image fits in
your flex box layout, such that the image enlarges, image size is smaller compared to the flex box
option that you have. Or it will compress
the size of the image. The dimensions of the image
will be reduced down to the size and match it with the size of layout
of your flex box. All right, You can
see right here, the entire image will be
fit within the element, keeping the same proportions. It won't basically drop. The proportions of the
image often leads to letterboxing where there are blank spaces around the image. Instead of leaving blank spaces, it has actually repeated the
image in the repeat section. We can change this to no repeat, so you can see the right most
part is set to no repeat. All right, the images
appear something like this and this is
exactly how we want it. We haven't added the image in the background
overlay section, in the background
itself, we had classic. We changed the color
and we added the image. All right, so I hope
you get the point. Now, coming down to
the next section, we can choose this
plus icon here. By clicking on the plus icon, we'll get an option
to choose whether we want to add a new flex
box or a grid layout. You have an option
to add a template. Now this templates will
allow you to browse between different element
or protemplates or templates that you have
saved in your system. We'll also look into how we can build and save our
own templates. Then you have an
option to edit with AI by using the element or I. You can just write a few of the things and element
or will just do the job of creating your entire section or
a few of the elements. For now, let's just add a new flex box and we'll keep the direction
to be vertical. All right, now what do we want? We want to add a new
section which will contain three cards
with a glass. In effect, there will be some gradient effect
going around. First and foremost,
we would like to re, use this text editor, this heading, and this divider. I'll just make a
duplicate of this. Also make a duplicate
of this divider. Now sometimes you might not
be able to click this divider simply because the size of
the divider is way too small. You can see and there is no gap between the texturator
and the heading. Even if you are trying to place your cursor
in the divider, sometimes you might not
be able to click on this. In that case, what
you can do is you can just click on
any of the element. Or in the container
itself, you can right click and
click on Structure. Earlier we saw Navigator, but now we have Structure
simply because we changed a few features in the element
or section, all right? But more or less the
concept remains the same. Right? Now we have divider. That's what we
wanted to duplicate. Let's make a duplicate of
it. And also the heading. Let's make a duplicate of it. All right, now what I can do, I can just simply drag
and drop it right here. By just doing this, I can also drag and drop the divider right
below this part. Also drag and drop
it below here. Now the color of this particular text editor
and the heading is white color and
the background is also somewhat of white color. You can change the
font color to black. Let's go to styling part. We'll change the
text color to black. Will also change the color
of this font to be black. All right, now once
we have done this, we would like to
center align this, both of these text. By just clicking on
this entire section, we can justify the content
center and align items center. Let's just make sure that
this has also Align Center. If it does not, what you can do, we can just go to content
and we can text to center. Fine. Now for this part,
what are we going to do? We Align Center, what do
we want for this part? This doesn't look good. The business aim in black,
color doesn't look good. We can just change
the color of this to somewhat like a darker gray. This gray color looks good. All right, we can just drop
down the text to something like make international
payments. Let's just keep it
like that, internal. Payments. All right. We can drop the font size of this or we could even
drop down the text of this. Let's just say international
payments. All right. All right.
International payments. What are we going
to do with this? You can see there is no spacing between the hero section
and the next section. In order to add some spacing between these two
different sections, we can play around with the
margin and padding settings. If you can see right here, I have an image right here which explains clearly what does padding and margin
actually mean. Let me explain. Each and
every element is a content. You can see the innermost
box is called as a content. It could be anything,
your entire flex box. It could be your button, it could be your text editor,
it could be a divider. It could be your heading, right? Each and every element
is called as a content. Now, outside the content, we have a border, right? Each and every content is
surrounded by a border. But between a border
and the content, there is some space
called as padding. All right? There is
some spacing between the border and content
called as padding. If you increase the size of padding or decrease the
size of the padding, what happens is that if you increase the size
of the padding, the border and the content will have some
spacing between them. When you add border,
what happens is that you'll find some spacing between the content
and the border. There is some spacing between the border and the next
element that you have, which is called a margin. All right, if you increase the margin or
decrease the margin, what essentially happens is that if you increase the margin, the spacing between the two
sections will separate out. The blank space which you'll
be left off with will be the spacing which by default that your Wordpress
website will have. All right, if you
decrease the margin, what happens is
that two sections will overlap with each other. But it won't happen
with padding, right? Because the padding is happening within the element itself. Padding is happening between
the border and content. I hope you get the point. Let's add a padding for this section in the advanced
tab. I'll go right here. And you'll find that initially both your margin
and padding will be on the link icon
will be highlighted. Which basically means that no matter where you click
on whether on top, right, bottom, or left,
we have four directions. The top, bottom,
left, and right. You can individually change the padding and margin settings for each and every direction or you can work around together. All right, By default, even if you change
the settings of top, bottom, right, or left, the same amount, the padding size will be applied to all the
four directions. You can see the current unit for the padding
is set to pixels, and for margin as well, we can add something like 50. You can see from left and from right also there
is some spacing. All right, you can see there is some spacing, but we
can just remove this. We do not want any padding from right and we do not
want any padding from left. You can see no spacing is left in right and left from bottom. We want something
like 35. All right. Now let's add a new
section inside this, plus I'm going to
click right here. Inside the flex box, I will choose the direction
to be horizontal. I've selected the direction
to be horizontal. What accentially happens is that the structure or the direction of the flex box is
set to horizontal. No matter how many
elements that we add, all of them will appear in line. Obviously, you have
understood about that concept earlier
in the video, which is flex box
versus intersection. All right, inside this,
what are we going to add? We're going to add a new
element called a container. Inside this container, we are going to add one more container. Now, inside the
second container, we'll add a third container. You can see we have
three containers, 12.3 If you're still not clear, let me just right cling
on the entire flex box. Choose the structure.
The structure and Navigator are both
of the same things. The structure appears
just after changing the few features in
the element settings. Right here, you'll
find that this is the flex box inside which
we have an outer container, inside which we have
an inner container. And this is the
innermost container. I hope you get the point. What essentially we are aiming
to do is we are trying to add three cards with a
gradient effect. All right. The reason why we are
doing this is because the third container
will have our gradient, the text, an icon, and the second container will
have some background image. All right. Assume that you have a big Amazon box inside which you have
a box from Walmart. Inside which you have
a box from Best Buy. That a nested element is
what we are trying to build. All right, so let me just
select the second container. Let me just make sure
that I've selected the second container by
going to the struct
7. Blocksy Theme Customizer - Trust Me It's Very Easy!: All right, now that you guys
have learned how to build your entire website using
the 11 or theme builder, let's look at our
header and footer right here so we can customize the header and footer using
the theme customizer, which you can see right here. This icon right here, the
customized icon at the top bar, allows us to use
the theme editor. This is the theme
customizer and as you know, we are actually using
the block theme. You can see right here
we have activated the block theme and
depending on your use case, you might also use some
other themes like Astra. Now overall, more or
less 80 to 90% of the elements that you'll
find right here in the theme customizer
will remain the same. But just few things
here and there might change depending on what kind of theme that you're
actually using. Now just for this video, I've kept my webcam off and you'll know the reason
why in just a moment. But let's just see, what other options do we have
in the theme customizer? In the general
options, you'll find general head site bar and other things like that where
you can also work around your color and typography
of your website. Then you have an option to make changes around your block, post, single post and
categories and stuff like that. Then you also have the option
to edit your pages. Then bottom of this entire
theme customizer, you'll find an
option called Core. Under core, you'll have
site identity menus, widgets, homepage settings,
and additional CSS. All right, let's go to the top. And under general
we have header. So we'll try to customize this header or navigation
bar for our website. What I'll do, I'll
just click on header. And once I click, you'll find I have elements and
I have headers. All right, And here
you'll find three rows. The top row, the main row, and the bottom row. So what does it
mean and why do we have three rows for that? I have this website, and over here you can see this is a
navigation bar right here. So this is like a main row. And at the top you
have the location, the working hours, and the
social icons right here. So this is acting
like a top row. This is like your main row, and this website doesn't
have a bottom row. Mostly, most of the
websites out on the Internet are using
just a main row. If you would like to add a top, you can add elements
inside this. So what do we want? We want a logo, we want menu, but we do not want search
icon in our navigation bar. Now the search icon could be helpful in case
where you have a e commerce website
where you would like to search products
or maybe services or different block posts. But for now, let's
just cross it out. All right, and what
are we going to do? We can add a new element
inside this row itself. Now you might see
that the row is being divided into two columns,
the left and the right. And here in the middle we
have few dotted lines. So basically it's trying to say that this is divided
into two sections. If you would like to change the settings around
of the header, you can just click on Main row and you'll find the structure. So earlier we saw the header. That means the header settings will be common for top row, bottom row, and the main row. Once you click on the main row, the settings will open up
just for this main row. All right, so here you
have the structure. The container
structure is default. You can even change the
two box full width. You can adjust the
height and width. You can even change the
design layout of it. So here you have the background. You have the option
to add some borders. You can also add
border at the bottom. And you can even add some
shadow to your header. But let's just go
back and let's try to add some elements
inside our main row. So here you can see we
have an option of account. That means some people would
like to give an option of login or logout
from their website. When people have a
e commerce website, obviously they
would like to give an option to the users to log in to their account so that they
can make previous orders. Or, you know, they can look
at their purchase history. They can get additional
discounts or coupons. So you can make use of
the account widget. Then you have the button HTML. So that way you can embed some other plug ins by
pasting the HTML code. Then you have the menu one
which is already being used. So all the pages that we have and we have built a
main menu, right? The menu was called as Navar, if I'm not wrong, so that
is being shown right here. Then you have the search
and the social icons. So right here, just
like how we have different social icons,
that's something similar. We have widget right here. So let's try to bring a button. And we can place this
button to the left of the main menu or to the right of the main
menu. All right, we can even add this in between. All right, we have
three columns. We just don't have two columns. It's just that when we do not add any
elements in between, obviously it's going
to leave some space. So here we have the button, and you can see it is taking up some default settings
in terms of design. Here the text, when
we hover around it, it turns the text color to blue. And the color of the button
also is blue by default. And when we hover around it, it turns into dark blue or something like a very
dark blue shade. All right, so we can change the color
of the button as well. We can just click on Button. And here you'll find
the options to choose between different
button layouts. So here you have a button where The button itself will have a background color or the
button could just have a border color and
the background of the button will be
transparent. All right. You can even change the
sizing of the buttons. You can even add label. So instead of download, if you would like to
give something like a contact or book a call, you can even add
something like this. Now if you would like to add a URL that whenever someone
clicks on this button, they should be
redirected to a page. You can add the link
URL if you want that. Whenever the link has been pasted and whenever someone
clicks on the button, they should be redirected
to a new page in a new tab. So sometimes what happens is that whenever you
click on the button, most of the times
the redirection will happen in the
same tab itself. But if you would like to give it an option to open the
new link in a new tab, you can just toggle this switch. All right. Then you
have an option to add your own CSS class
and other stuff. When we go to the design, you can see you can
change the font color. You can even change
the button color. So let me just make it this. And we can change the
button color to green. Here we can select the color. Now here you won't
find the color that we saved as a global color
in our Elementor, just because this
is a theme settings and that was your
Elementor page Builder. Here we can just select green
color manually by placing our cursor and something
similar, but not exactly. I don't think we would
find the exact same color. And this is for initial
and this is for hover. So we can just copy the
hex code and we can paste the same color
for hover as well. So whenever we hover, the
button color won't change. All right, so that's how we have maintained
the consistency. Now coming to the
font color part. The font color initially
is set to black. All right? Okay. So the color, this is not for your menu
but rather for your button. All right, so here the
initial text color is white, and on hover also it's white. So we won't change it here. You can add border
radius if you would like to give a circular, or you know, rounded
edges to your button. You can even add some margin and other things to work
around your design. Coming back to your main menu, here you'll find your main menu. And here you have
a logo now logo. You'll find that it's
taking up the site title, but it's not taking the logo. So here you can
just select a logo, you can choose an image. So here I'm going to select this image as the
logo of my web page. Here you'll find that this image has a text in white color. Because you can see the logo is being appearing right here. But since the
background color of our header is white and the
text color is also white, the logo is not being
displayed properly. So in that case, we
have two options. Either we can Photoshop
of our logo in a way that the text color turns into black or somewhat to a dark she. Or we can change the background
color of our main row, which is our navigation bar. So the best thing
would be to change the background color,
you know, header. So what we can do right here, we can just change
the background color. But before we do that, we don't want the site title to show up. So we can just toggle this off and site title won't be
displayed anymore. All right. You can even change the
alignment of your content, which means whether you want your logo to appear
in the left line, center line, or right line. You can even do that here you have an option
to choose between different devices depending
on your responsiveness mode. Coming to the design part here, you can change the margin. What are we going to do? We'll change the
background color. When I click on main row here, you'll find Design And I can
change the background here. I have an option to make use of a classic
background in the color. I have an option to choose the classic background or I can even make use of a gradient. Gradient. As you've
learned previously, it's like two colors
are being used at the same time in a linear
or in a radial format. You can see you
can choose between different premade color schemes
that this theme offers. But you can even work around
your own custom colors. You can even add your own
image in the background, but that would
look really awful. So let's just stick with color. And here you can play
around the color. All right, Now, when you add a color to this
particular, you know, background color,
this is just for your main row and not for
your top and bottom row. What I mean is, if
you would like to, you know, place your
button to the top row, then you'll find that
the top row will have some different background color. So the settings are just
applied for the main row and not for your top or bottom
row. I hope you get the point. Let's bring this back because we don't want multiple rows, we just want one single row. And here we have the
black background color. Now when we keep black
background color, we can see that
the text is text. Or the font for our menu one, the color is not really
that attractive. Both the shades, the background and the P color
itself are very dark. So we have to make some kind
of a contrasting effect. We'll click on Menu One. We'll go to Design, and we'll change the P color to white. Let's bring this white here. You'll find three color options, Initial, hover, and active. Now, what does active mean? Active basically means that wherever you have
clicked on the page, let's just say you
have clicked on home. So you're on the home
page itself, right? So whenever you are
on the home page, the color of this text will change to a color which you have set, which
will indicate that. Okay, you are on this
page. All right. Let's make white
for all the colors. And here you'll
find Hover is also white and Active is also white. You can even change
the font family. You can even change the
sizing of the font. You can even change
the font weight. All right, here you have
all the different options. You can even add
drop down option right here in the
theme customizer. All right, so here,
the dropdown option could be of two choices. Whether you want the drop
down menu to display whence you hover around that
particular page element, or like to click
on that element. And then the drop down
menu should be displayed. That's something
like it. You can even change the
items over effect. That means whether do you
want it to be simple, solid color box color. You can even add
some spacing between the items in the drop down menu. You can even change the offset. Basically means that the
spacing between the elements. All right, then you have
the horizontal offset. It basically means that vertical
and horizontal spacing. All right, coming back
to the part where we have your background color, you have a black
background and you have some dark grayish black
shade of a hero section. Now this header and this hero section are
not looking that great. Can't we just make this main row something that it appears
to be transparent? Obviously, we can do that by just going back to your header. We can just go back to header, we can just go to headers, select Global Header, and then make use of the transparent functionality and
toggle the switch. Now you'll find that the entire header is
now transparent. It will take the design
of a hero section. Now you'll find
that once we make our header as transparent, the margin and padding settings
has been dropped down. That means our hero section is being coinciding
with our header. We can add the margin
and padding later on to our hero section by going back to our element
or page builder. But for now I'll just keep
this as my transparent header. Now here you'll also find one button which is
Edit conditions. Now what does it mean? Once I click on it, you'll
find that whether I want this transparent header
display settings to be displayed for my entire
website or do I want it to be displayed on a
particular web page only I can choose between
different options. All right, If I make this
something like let's just say include
to just this page. Let me just select as your page, which is which is
just this page. And exclude. You
can add exclude. We can exclude this
to which page? Let's just say I would
like to exclude this from my block page or some other pages like
block page, all right? I can exclude this
from block page. I can even exclude this
from another page, maybe a four or four page. All right, So I can just
save the settings now. Let's see what happens
if I close this. And let me just publish this so that all the settings
will be saved. And once I close, I'll go
to my Press dashboard. I'll open up a block page by
going to the post section. A post, I'll view my. So once I go here, okay. Again, I'll find this
transparent header. But ideally we should not. Let's go to pages and
what are we going to do? We'll navigate to
the block page. Where do we have our log page so we can create a
block page if we want. Let's go back to our website. We'll customize our header by
going to the global header, settings it conditions,
and we want to include this to just our single page. Okay, This blog is just
a page and not for post. You can see this is of, this blog is part of
our page and post. Let's select single post. Okay. Once we do this single
post, we'll save conditions. Okay, when we go back, we'll change the main
row color to black. All right, we have black color, or maybe let's just change this to something
like blue shade. I'm going to change
to a bluish shade. All right, something
around this. Let's publish. Let's go back to our header, Global Header
Settings conditions. And we want to include the transparent header
to a single page, exclude this in single post. All right, let's just
say all post archives. All right, the
conditions that we have used in this and once
we go we publish. I'm not quite sure why the settings have
not been applied. Maybe let's try to
refresh our web page. Let me go back to header, global header
settings conditions. All right, let's try by making use of the
privacy policy page. I'm going to go over this, I can save conditions publish. I'll close them. Go to pages, all pages here. We should find our
privacy policy page. I think we have trashed it. Let's restore this page. All right, let's go back to
a pages. Here we have this. Let's preview this now. You'll find that this header
has a blue background. That's exactly what the
entire conditions part meant. Let's get back to
our main website. We'll go to this web page. We'll select on Custom
once we go here, once we scroll down,
you'll find under menus, find that currently we're
using the nav bar menu. Now in the nav bar menu
we have a home page, we have the about page, we
have the contacts page. But what if we would like to add few more pages in the main menu? Let's try to add items. Here you'll find elementor 58, which is the page which we built using our entire page builder. Let's try to add
this. Once we add it, we can drag and place
exactly where we want. We can reorder them. Once we have done this, we
can just save and publish. Now once we have done
this, what you can do, instead of setting
this home page as the default page
of your website, you can set this as the default
page by just going back. You can go back and you can select on Homepage
Settings under Core. So let's go to
homepage Settings, and initially you might be seeing your latest post
as the default one. You can just select a static. Instead of selecting the
home page as your home, you can select element of 58. And this is what you'll
find as the default page. All right, under post page
you'll find different options. You can even add
a new post page. All right, we'll look into how we can add block
post to this part. But let's just
publish this for now. We'll go back and let's look
at some other settings. Now here you'll also find different menus and different
widgets that we have. These are all Gutenberg
press elements. Here you have the
homepage settings, which we have discussed coming
to the site identity part. Here you'll find the site
title that we have saved as tress and you'll
also find site icon. What does site icon mean here
at the top to this website? You'll find this particular
icon right here. And this icon, if you would
like to change this icon to something like this or maybe some other image of your own, you can just select an icon. Just we'll select this
image and it's asking us to crop because the dimensions
are 512 by 512 pixels. So we'll just drop it down
to this dimension here, you'll find that the site title or site icon
has been changed. All right, let's
just save this and we'll go back to our
theme customizer. Here in the theme under header, we have made changes
around this. Once we go to the general, you'll find different options. All right, under general, you'll also find one option
which is scroll to top. Now what does it mean once
I add the scroll to top? Once I scroll down, you'll find a button at the bottom
right of your website. Now this button allows you that whenever you
click on the button, this will scroll up to the
topmost part of our web page. That is very helpful
feature when you have a long list of elements or
sections in your web page. And it helps your users to navigate to the topmost
part of your web page. Now once we click on this arrow icon of
your scroll to top, you'll see different
button icons. You can see you have
a default button, you can change to something like this, something like this. You can even change
the button shape, whether you want it
to be square circle. You can even change the design, whether you want the icon
color to be white shaped, background color,
you can change, you can even add some shadow to it and you can even align
whether you want it to display to the
right most side or the left side depending
on your use case. That's the only
reason why I switched off my webcam Just to
show that scroll to top. Functionality is
available mostly at the bottom right part of
your web page. All right. Now at the bottom, you'll find that there is some moon icon. It basically switches to a dark mode theme for
your theme customizer. And once you click
on the sun icon, it will switch on to
light mode theme. That was some basic information. Let's publish this
and once we go back, we'll just toggle this
off screw to top. You'll also find an option to switch on to the website frame. So this, you know, makes your website
have a border, a frame kind of effect. You can even change
the frame size, You can change the frame
color and things like that. All right, Coming back
to the breadcrumbs and other parts under
the general layout, what does breadcrumb mean? So assume that you
are on Walmart page. Let me just take
you to Walmart so that I can explain the
things pretty easily. I'll go to Walmart and
if I go to Department, okay, Let me just select
any of the things. Let's just say I'm
going to electronics. Under electronics, we have, let's just say iphone. And if I click on iphone here, you'll find cell
phones shop by brand. Apple iphone. So this
is like a breadcrumb. It's showing up
that in which page, inside which page inside which page you
found the product. So something similar can
be done by embedding the breadcrumb inside your
main row and things like that. All right, so hope
you get the point. Let's look at footer. So once I scroll down here, you'll find this particular part which is at the bottom row. Again in the footer also
you'll find three rows. The top row, the bottom row, or I should say the middle
row and then the bottom row. All right, here you can
add multiple widgets. You can find menu,
different social icons, and vegetaria one
to three, to six. So let's add vegetaria one, vegetaria two, and
vegetaria three. If I click on vegetaria one, you'll find that
initially it's blank. We can add Gutenberg blocks. These are tres Gutenberg blocks. Here I can add heading,
I can add a heading, something like let's just
say about us. All right. We can also change the
tag of this heading. Initially, it might
be said to H two. You can change this to H346
depending on your use case. And here you'll find about us. Fine, we can add another also, let's just say paragraph tag. And I can add some basic
text, something like this. I can just add the simple text. I'll place the text right here. Or I could just paste such that the styling won't
be pasted right here. You can find the about
us in the vegetaria too. I can add the page settings. Page list could be brought
up or the entire menu. All the pages that are part
of our website will be shown. I can just search for page list. I can bring it down here. You'll find all
the page list that we have and which are
part of our website. All right. We can even add
a heading to the top here. I can add something
like pages, All right. You can see the pages are
appearing below your page list. So you can just
drag and drop it. Or you can just place it by
just clicking on the pages. By clicking on the up arrow,
you can just place it. Let me just select this part. I'll just drag this
or move this down. All right, And now you
can see pages appear at the top and the page list
appears at the bottom. Fine. Here, you can add
other elements as well. Let me add something like let's
just say contact us fine. We can add other blocks here. You'll find a bunch of
different options to use from, you can find and embed
your Youtube video, your Vimeo video, and many other things that
you can add right here, which I won't go in detail. So who get the point about making use of different
Gutenberg elements? All right, here you'll find
different social icons also, and other things
that we have here. You'll find different
options to work around different settings
about like colors, your typography, the
performance of your website. But if you're
generally speaking, if you're making use
of a page builder, whether it be element or, or DV, it's best to go around
with the color, the typography settings in that page builder itself
rather than making use of your theme customizer so that your website
doesn't get broken. Here we have the entire, here we have covered the entire theme
customizer settings. I hope guys enjoyed
this lecture. In the next lecture
we'll see how we can create block post using
the theme customizer.
8. Create & Edit Blog Posts - Trust Me It's Very Easy!: All right, let's see how
we can make a block post. Here at the top, you'll find
plus icon, the plus new. Once you hover around it, it will drop down
a list of options, post media page, lining page, template, and user.
So what does it mean? Once you click on post, you will be allowed to
create a block post. If you clickon media, you'll be allowed
to upload images, videos, and GIF files. If you clickon page, you'll be allowed to create a web page. If you click on landing page, you'll be allowed to
create a landing page. So the basic difference between a landing page and
a simple web page is basically that
a landing page is generally optimized
for conversion. It basically means that
you want that users, whenever they land on
your landing page, that they should enter some details about their
personal information or make an instant transaction
in exchange for some digital product
or a service or some kind of a
booking to your event. That's about landing page, a web page which displays and showcases the
content and information, that's your web page. Generally speaking,
landing page is for those who want to make
an instant transaction. And the purpose of the
entire page is not to communicate about the company or the product or the service, but rather to make an
instant transaction, whether it be just
collecting e mail address or their money from entering the card details that's
landing page Template. As we have seen earlier in the Element or Page Builder
that we can create templates. Right here we have users, you can add multiple users
to your web press website. Let's click on Post. Once you click on it, you will be shown this press editor here. You can add title
to your blog post. Here, you can add the
content for your blog post. When I try to add content, let me just give this something
like blog number one. All right? And we can say
that this is a test blog. All right. This is my title. Now here in the right pane, you will find that the
visibility is set to public. That means whenever this particular block
post will be published, it will be available to public and they can
be viewed by anyone. All right, Now the
only difference between a block post and a
web page is that although the content of the block post could be repurposed in
the web page itself. But block post essentially allows your users who are
reading your blog to leave comments at the bottom
of your block post and share this blog in the
social media profiles. So that's the only benefit
of adding a new block post. When you're creating blocks, you can make use of templates, you can change the URL. You can even set who's the
author of this block post. If you're multiple users, you can choose who is
publishing this blog. You can categorize
each and every blog. Let's just say you
have three blogs, three categories of
blogs, web design, e commerce, and SEO. So you can categorize them
by adding new categories. You can add new hashtags
so that when people search for around different blocks that
you have published, they can just enter
a few keywords. And depending on the tags and categories that you
have categorized them, they will show up, then
you'll find a featured image. Now even if your content of the block doesn't
have an image, you can add a featured image so that when your entire web page, which will display
all the block cards, then over there your featured
image will be shown. Excerpt basically means that a simple summary of what your entire block is all
about will be shown. Now excerpt is
something optional. You can write it down here. It won't automatically
detect your content and form an entire
except by its own. You'll have to
enter it manually. All right, here at the bottom, you'll see whether you
want to allow comments by the users or do you want to allow pink backs
and track backs? That means anyone can link
back to your blog post. It's always a good practice
to keep this as checked. All right, we can add
some lock content here. I can add text content, something like, let's
just say this, okay. I'm going to copy the
content from this website. I can paste it right here. I can even change whether
I want this to be bold, italic, whether I want
this to be a heading tag. I can change this
to heading H two. I can make this as H one tag. By default, each
and every title of your blog post will be
set to N H one tag. All right. We can just
edit them. All right. Or we can even select
each and every element that we have on our web page. Okay, here you can add
a few extra things. You can even add link to your particular word
or your sentences. You can highlight
few of the words. You can add an
inline code image. You can add a subscript
or superscript. There are a bunch of
different options. All right, if you click on
the plus icon right here, let me just show you.
What do I mean by that? If I click on this plus icon, you can browse between different Gutenberg elements
or Gutenberg blocks. Here I can make use of, let's just say I would
like to embed an image. I can just search for
image here I have, I can even make use
of the gallery. That means multiple images
could be shown up right here. You can even make use
of the site logo. You won't have to
manually navigate the logo that you have
set for this website. You can even make use
of the featured image. Whatever image is set for the featured image
will be shown here. You can even set the
cover for this blog post. All right, You can even
add media and text so that the content and the image will be wrapped
around. All right. You can see that
basically says that set media and words side by
side for a richer layout, you can work a few things. We can upload the image or we could select the image
from media library. That's what I would
prefer to do here. I can select these guys. All right, and this is what we have for
our blog post here. I can even publish, or I
can add some more content. Let me try to add
some more content. I can just add some
paragraph content here. I'll copy the below text. Fine, I'll paste it right here. I can make sure that
this is paragraph text. You can find that this
is a paragraph text. All right, here we have
the entire block post. I can even add a
few more content. I can just go to the
about page here, I'll find majority
of the content. I think I can just copy. I can just place it right here. All right, let me just
do, I'll paste it. Okay, I think we might have
not copied the entire thing, so we'll just copy and
paste the entire content. Now once we have
done this, publish. All right, we can publish and you'll find that this blog
is available to view. Now once we view the post, let's see how it looks like. So here you can find that the header is actually
having a blue background. Because if you
remember correctly, when we were trying to
give some conditions to your header display settings, we said that just for
the home page itself, which is element of 58, the header should have a
transparent background. But for your blog pages, the header should have
a blue background. All right, so here you can find the area where
people can leave comment. Here they can post the
comment and they can even reshare your content. All right, here
you'll find that. Who published this blog? Which day Exactly? And is it categorized
into any category or not? If you would like to rearrange them and form it in
a proper structure, you can even do that by
going to the customize. Again, we'll click
on Theme Customizer. Here in the block post section, you'll find single posts here. There are different layouts
to structure your post. By default it is set
to narrow width. That means first your title
will show up, then the image, and then this is how the
tras structure will be. If I change this
to normal width, you can see that there
is no such padding or margin between your right
and left directions. If I change this
to left side bar, then here you'll find different post titles
here on the left side. And something similar can
be shown in the right side. All right, here you
can even make use of featured image if
I published this. Wait a second, Just
a second here. You wouldn't find a
featured image for this block post because
we haven't set anything. So let me just close. I'll edit this post by clicking
on that button. And here you'll find
that we haven't set any featured image. So let me just select
a featured image. What I'm, I will select this
guy as the featured image. All right. This is not part of the block post but rather
it's a featured image. So let me just update my blog
and when I view my page. So in order to view this, I can just click on this
button to view the post. And it will open in a new tab. Now here, although we have
said as a featured image, you wouldn't find it
on our block post. Why? So if we click on
the theme customizer, when we go over the
single post settings, and when we scroll down, you'll find that the featured image setting is toggled off. Once we toggle, you'll find that first the featured
image will be shown, then the title, and then who
published this entire block. Post here, you can
even add post tags, so all the hashtags that you
are using will be shown. You can even add a share
box at the bottom. People will be able to share this post to their
Facebook page, linked in profile,
Pinterest, or even Twitter. You can even add an
author box so that author who has published this blog
can add few more comments. You can even add post
navigation. All right. You can even add
post navigation. And you can even
add related posts, which basically means
that all the posts related to this
title and related to this category will be shown as a form of suggestion at the
bottom of the block post. I hope you get the point about entire building and
editing your block post. I think this was
pretty much about it.
9. Designing our Homepage Mobile Responsive: All right, let's
look into how we can build our
website responsive. Right now, the
thing which you're seeing right here in the screen, this kind of a design layert will be shown on
desktop screens. What happens if we view this same website in a
tablet or a mobile screen? Obviously, the elements might
coincide with each other, because the sizing width and the padding margin will change according to
the device width. So we'll have to change before we actually go about making
our website responsive. There are a few things that are left to do with this website, particularly with
our hero section. First, as you can see, this image and the
content here is being coinciding with
our header because we have kept our
header as transparent. Let's add some padding
to the hero section. We'll click on
editiith Elementor. And let's just wait
till it loads up. Right here for this section,
I'll click right here. You can see we are editing
the entire container. We'll go to the
advanced settings, and right here in the padding, I'll add some padding from top. I'll just use my up arrow key on the keyboard to drop
down the hero section. So our 100 pixels of padding
from top looks good. So let's just publish this. All right, once I scroll down, I have all these sections that
appear in desktop screen. Now there is one
thing that I left to cover on earlier,
which is accordion. When we were looking about tabs, I think we should have covered about the accordion
section as well. Let me add a new
section quickly. I'm going to add a new
section right here. I will add a flex
box of two columns. Here we have our accordion. Let's first we'll add a title. Let's add a title
below this title, we will make use of what
do you say our accordion? We can add an accordion instead. What we can do, we can just make a duplicate of this divider, that we can just bring
this divider right here. One thing, you might
question yourself, that the width for this
divider right here in this particular
container was this much. The width was very big than
what we can see right here when we duplicated and placed right here
inside this container. You can see the width has
adjusted accordingly. Why is that? Because right
here we have two columns. We have two containers. It
has adjusted its height. Or rather I should say
with, accordingly, fine, let's just left a line. This, we'll increase the
width to about this point. We'll add accordion. Let's add accordion.
Now, accordion is something like an C section. You can see here
we have accordion. We can click on these
different items and they will collapse
and collapse. In the accordion one,
you'll have some content, you have an icon. When it is already open, you'll find the
content right here. You can change the content,
You can change the title. It is something similar to
what we have seen earlier. What we can do, we can
even change the icon. Right now we have
the icon library. We can navigate between
different icons that we have. You can see recommended icons for our accordion
are right here. You can even change the
alignment for the icon. Instead of making the left line, we can change it to
right line right here. It looks good, fine in
the left container. What we can do, we can
add one more container. What I'm trying to do is I'm, I'm just trying to
make use of this, this kind of a box. Now this will become very
difficult for beginners. Let's try to make an easy
version of this layout. What I'll do, I'll just add a new container inside
this existing container. And let's just make sure that this container is vertical align and the width of this particular container
height is actually 100. All right, so it actually
uses the entire height. Fine. Let's make it full width. And what are we going to do? We'll change the
width also later on, but for now let's try to
add few images inside this. I'm going to add, we'll change the image
to something like, here I have this image, I'm going to make
use of this image. I will also add one more image. So let me just make a
duplicate of this. All right. The container
container direction will be changed to horizontal. Fine. The inner
container direction will be changed to horizontal. I'll change this image to something like around,
let's just say. All right, you can
see the direction, or rather I should say the sizes of these images are different. In order make them something similar,
I'll duplicate this. I'll duplicate this. We'll make sure that this
container all right. You know what I should
do. I should make a duplicate of this
container. All right. One container has
these two images and the other container
has these two images. Fine, let's try to
reverse the content. All right, this is
how it appears. Now the container, the inner container that
we have right here, will try to change
its height such that within the container
itself, this looks good. In my opinion, we can give some background
color to this container. Let me style this. We can select a color, we can give this
something like black or somewhat like a darker
shade. This looks good. This is exactly how we have made a design layout something
similar to this, right? The only difference
is that the image has some border radius. All right. I hope you get
the point about this part. We can even add a few more
items inside this accordion. By going to the content, we can duplicate duplicate
items will be made. We can change this four, this 23 and so on. All right, let's publish this. Now let's look into how we can make our website responsive, which was the entire intention behind building
this entire video. Right here at the top, you'll find the desktop on, the tablet icon, and
the smartphone icon. Now if you don't find
this at the top, you would definitely find it
at the bottom left corner of your elementor
editing pine fine. The website looks good
on desktop screens, but let's see how it looks
like on tablet screens. I'll just click on my
tablet portrait mode. Here you can find
that our hero section itself is not
looking that great. The title itself, we can
drop down the font size. But the two columns right here, it doesn't
look that good. What we can do is we
have two options. Either we can drop down the font size and try to
fit all the content in a way that it gets fit
within the tablet width. But I would suggest to make use of another section
what we can do. We can just replicate this by right clicking on our container. If you're not able
to, what you can do, you can just click on Structure. Make sure that you are selected the hero section
of our container, and then you can just
make a duplicate of it. All right, once you
have done that, just below this hero section, you'll find the
duplicate screen, Fine. Now, in the duplicate section, what I'll do, I'll just
remove this container. Having this image,
we don't want that, We'll just delete this here. We will be left with this
particular container having a textor, the divider, and the title, followed by another
testator and two buttons. Let's try to align them in a way that it appears
at the center. For that, I'll just
click on this container. I'll go to the direction. Obviously we want this
to be horizontal. It doesn't make a
difference even if I change this to vertical. But what we want
is that we want to justify the content to
center. Let's do that. Now you can find
that the container has aligned in center, fine. Now all that is good, but
let's also try to change the entire font size of
this particular title. I'll go to Style Tab,
I'll click on Typography. I'll drop down the size
to somewhat about, let's just say 50 pixels. So I'll just keep the 50 pixels and that
would look good, fine. Now you might find
that over here. We have some padding from top, but we don't have any
padding from bottom. Let's add a padding
from bottom as well. Here what I'll do, I'll just
click on this container. I'll go to the advanced section. Right here, you'll find padding
from top hundred pixels, but let's drop it down and we'll change the padding
for bottom as well. I'll just unlink the values. Once you click on Unlink, you'll find that the top
values has also reset to zero. Simple reason behind
that is as you can see, besides this padding, you'll
find the tablet icon. The settings for the padding has been reset for
the tablet device. Again, I'll have to make
this as 100 for bottom. I'll make this
something like 50. That would leave us
with sufficient space to start our next section. Fine. If you want, you can delete one
button if you want, but I would just
keep it as it is. And if you want,
you can even center align this content right here. I'll just go to this part. I'll go to styling, and I'll change the alignment to center. Now, all these settings are just applied for tablet screens. You can see right here we
have tablet portrait mode. We can align this
divider in center. You can even our
title to center. Let's go to content Here,
we'll find alignment. This too also will
align this center. Let's make sure that this
particular container having two buttons in line are also justified
Content center. All of these things
appear in center, fine. Now even if I view
the desktop mode, you'll find that the other section appears
right below this. We don't want that to happen. This part of the hero
section should display only on tablet and movie screens and should be hidden on desktop. Whereas the top hero section,
which we have right here, should be displayed only on
desktop screens and should be switched off for tablet
and smartphone devices. So let's click on this
particular container. We'll edit this container. We'll go to the Advanced tab, right under Advanced tap. When you scroll
down, you'll find the section called
as responsive. Just click on responsive. And here you'll find
different options to choose. The visibility mode, we'll
hide on tablet portrait mode, we'll hide on mobile
portrait mode. And the below section, we'll hide this one
in desktop mode, obviously, because we don't want this part to be displayed
on desktop screens. If I go to the desktop mode, you'll find this hero section appearing And this part which is being shown but just in gray mode because
we are the advent, we are the editor, that's why we are able to see this part. All right, here, once we go in the tablet
screen, you'll find the Next hero section. This
part of the hero section. Fine. Let's go scroll down and here you'll
find these three cards. Now these three cards
gradient effect, we worked so much and there was so much complications right
in nested containers. And we learned and our energy went into waste
because we cannot just fit all three columns
in one single width. Then how can we work
about this simple way? We can just click
on this container. Instead of making
the direction of the flex box to be horizontal, can't we do just
something like vertical? We can achieve the same result. Right now you can see the width according to the width
of our desktop screen. Gradient cards are being
fit properly here. You can even adjust
the icon, this text, and this text center
line if you want, but I'll just keep it as it is. All right, and mind it very
well that this direction, which is set to
vertical, currently is only applicable for
the tablet screens, not for desktop screens. If I just go back
to desktop mode, you'll find that
these three columns, these three containers
will appear in a horizontal flex box mode. Fine. Let's go back
to this tablet mode. We can drop down this font size by going
to the typography, and we can make them
appear such that they appear in one single line. Here again, we'll make
this 50 pixels and make sure that this is selected
in tablet mode, right? So 50 pixels of size for this title will be applied
only on tablet screens. I hope you get the point.
Once we scroll down, we will find another section where we can just copy
and paste the styling. So we'll just, we'll paste
the styling right here. All right, and here
you can see we have the title again in 50 pixels. Now, the tab one and tab two, both of them are
appearing nicely. We don't necessarily
have to change, at least for tab I
don't find the need to actually change
anything inside tab one. But for tab two, I
do think that we can change few things
around such that our icon doesn't appear
so small and the text also appears properly in one single line,
the title itself. So let's try to erit them. That what I'll do,
I'll just publish this. Okay, I'll publish this. I'll go back to my view mode once I preview my changes here. When I hover around
my editith elementor, you'll find tab one
and tap two container. Let's just quickly
click on tap two so that whatever content
we have in tap two, we can edit it directly here. I can just click on
responsive mode, tablet mode. Here, you'll find the icon. Let's click on the image box. Here we can go to
the styling part. Inside the styling, we have the image. Let's
click on Image. Here you can see the
width is currently set to 15% Increase this to something
like, let's just say 30. Okay. We can apply the same settings
to this also later on, but let's just try to work
around this part here. The content itself,
where we have the title and the description. We can also reduce down
the typography of it. Let's just drop down the
sizing to about 20 pixels. 20 pixels would look good
in my opinion as this. Also we'll apply the
same settings all. Let's copy and we'll paste
the same settings right here. Paste styling. And here
you can find that this is how our entire tab
two box will appear. Fine, Let's publish this all. Let's preview changes.
We'll go back here. Let's refresh the web page. When we'll view the tablet more, you'll find the changes that we made will be
reflected right here. Let me just scroll down to the part where we can
go to the tab two. Once I select tap two, you'll find that a title is
appearing in one single line. Also, the image appears to be bigger than what it used
to look previously. Once you scroll down, you'll
also find your accordion, which I don't find any need to make chines
around the accordion. But for this part where we have this particular images and different sections that
we have right here, we can add some
gap between them. Gap between this container
and this container. We can add some
spacing between them. We can just click on
the outer container. We can scroll down here. We can just increase
the gap between them. Fine so that it occupies
the entire space. 70 from column and row
looks good, in my opinion. Or you could even
change the direction of the flex box from
vertical to reversed. It appears like this up to you. You can just change
it however you want. Once you scroll down, you'll
find this section where this image should overlap
with the next section, but it doesn't happen
in tablet mode. Why? So let's check it out. Obviously, there is some issue with padding and
margin settings. We don't have to necessarily
make any changes around this particular section where
we have this guy's image. Let's just quickly go
to the next section. Here we have this part. We will keep the padding
settings as it is, but what we actually
want is that this section should have margin
from top in minus value. Let's go to advanced.
Here we have margin. Let's unlink the values
for margin from top. I'll drop it down that it appears the image appears to overlap with
the next section. Fine, this is how
the content looks. Let's click on the image
such that the text and this image doesn't coincide
with each other so much. We'll go to this image
Advanced settings from right, you'll find that
there is margin, which is minus study pixels. Let's drop it down here. We had -30 Initially here from bottom we
had minus 220, right? Drop down to something like -18 I think -18 would look
good, -18 looks good. And we'll keep this as it is. Fine, here we have
different things. Now, the content for this container where
we have this part, it's touching our entire wet. You can see right
here what we can do. We can actually give some padding from
right and left, right. Let's just go to this container. We'll go to advanced
from top and bottom. We do have 20, but let's also make it from
right and left. Let's add from right
and left, 20 pixels. Now the content appears nice. Fine. Let's also drop down this title to what we have
right here. I'll just copy. I'll paste styling that
it appears right here, But you can find the color of
the font was changed here. We'll have to change the
color of the font to white. Okay, white color font. Here we have these images. Fine, everything is appearing
nicely. Let's scroll down. And here you have the
call to action section. Fine, we don't have
to worry about this because this
looks actually good. Now, within a matter
of few minutes, we actually made our website responsive for the tablet mode. Let's see how a website would
look like on mobile device. We'll just quickly click on the mobile portrait
mode icon right here. You'll find that
the hero section looks good, in my opinion. All right, but we can still
add some gapping between all the elements such
that it actually covers the entire space
for the hero section. So let's just click click on the outer container
for the hero section. We'll scroll down in the layout tab itself. You'll find gaps. So let's just try to increase
the gap such that you know, we don't have a lot of spacing. Fine. Also for this
entire section, we'll go to Advanced and
we'll drop down the padding. All we'll drop down
the padding and we just want padding
from top to be around, let's just say 50
from bottom also. Let's just leave it as 50. Fine, I'm not quite sure
how our header would look like when it coincides
with our hero section. Let's just keep this
as 100 by default. I think this looks pretty cool. Once we scroll down here, you have all the other elements. Again, we can drop
down the font style. The typography size
needs to be drop down to about 25
pixels for this part. Also, we can drop it
down to somewhat like, I would say, ten pixels, because right now we are
viewing in a desktop, right? We might find that
the content for business name is way too small. But once we view the exact
website on a mobile device, then we would find that
this appears nicely. Let's also drop
down the width of this thing to somewhat
around this divider. Width also looks good. Again, for this
part, you can drop down the font styling
and font size. I think it looks good, so I won't mess around
with this part. Yeah, but for the
second container where we have the image
in the background, we can change this
guy's position in the second container. Let me just select structure. Right here in the structure, we have the second container. The third container, Okay, the second container,
background, we'll go to style. Here you have the background in the display size,
Here you have cover. The repeat is default, the position cannot be changed, I think so let's try to see if we can change the
position or not. If I make this as custom, then let's see what happens. Okay, for mobile device only, we can change this to
something around. All right. This would look
good in my opinion. Fine, This looks really good. Let's also apply the same
settings that we have done for this part for the
other sections as well. Fine. What are we going to do? I don't think we need to drop down the font
size for the title. All right. I'll just copy. I'll scroll down and I'll paste the styling for this title. I'll do the same thing for this and for the
divider as well. All right, now we have
tab one and tab two. Let's click on Tapon to
see how it looks like. Tab has adjusted
itself very nicely. The direction of the flex
box has been changed from horizontal to
vertical automatically. But for tab two, I think there is still some work
need to be done. You can see right here, we don't want this border to
appear. All right. We don't want this
border to appear. If we want, we can
add this right here. Let's change that thing. We'll just publish this. For now, let's
preview the changes. We'll click on tth
Elementor and tab two here, I'll go to mobile screen for this container
in the Style tab. Go to border, I'll remove this. We'll make sure that
there is no border, or even if there is some border we want to add to
the bottom one. Let's add to the bottom. This is how the spacing would look like, but
that doesn't look good. Let me just reset it back. I'll make this as zero again. Fine. What else can we do? I think this looks good
if we remove the border, and this looks pretty
good in my opinion. Fine. Let's just publish
this. All right, when we go back, we'll
refresh our page. You'll find that the
changes will be applied. Let's click on the mobile mode. We'll scroll down to
our tab two part. All right, here
you have tab two. And this is how it appears in this container
for the accordion. Or rather I should say that tab, you'll find that the
alignment is like, this position needs
to be vertical. Let's see how it
works in vertical. It doesn't help in vertical. Let's just keep it like
horizontal and center here. You can choose between
different types. What essentially was
happening earlier was that on desktop and
tablet screens, Tab and Tap To are
appearing at the top. But now in mobile device, what is happening, It's just
acting like an accordion. Here you have Tab option, and then at the bottom
you have Tap option here. The next section,
the accordion here. Let's add some
padding if you want, you can, but for now I'll
just leave it as it is. And here things looks good. Let's scroll down
to the part where we have this part here, the image, and this part. Since we have said the
image index to be one, it will appear at the front. Here we have the body content, the title, the
description, the divider. And here you have the image. Image appears in
front of the text. Right now, we don't want this overlapping
thing to happen. What we can do,
instead of making this margin to be minus 220, we can just keep it like this. This looks much cleaner
and much better. And here I think we are
pretty much good to go. Only change we need to make
is around the business name, the title, and so on. So let's copy and paste
the styling very quickly. All right, let's also
align this center here. I can go to style part
for the text editor. I can align this center. I can align this
center for the part. Okay, for the entire test thing. We can justify the
content center. Let's make sure that the image box that
we have right here, all of them appear
in center alignment, needs to be center
for all of them. We can just copy. We
can paste the styling for this fine here. Also we can change
the settings. Fine. You can find that all
the partner images, the partner logos are appearing nicely in
a vertical format, but we need to add some
gaps between them. Let's click on the
innermost container. We'll scroll down and
we'll add some gaps. All right, gap about 45
pixels would look good. In my opinion, 45
pixels looks good. Let's just keep it as it is. We can change this again, but I'm not going to go and
do that over and over again. Here you can drop down the font size if you want,
even for the button. Also, you can make this
button a little bit smaller just for
the mobile screen. You cannot change
the button style just for the mobile screen. If you change this too small, the same button size will reflect on the other
devices as well. Let's just keep it as it is. And I think we are pretty much done for the responsive mode
of the website as well.
10. Build Custom Header / Navigation Bar: Let's see how we can build our own custom navigation bar using the element or plug in. Right here you can see we have a list of all the
pages that we have. The element or 58 page is the
front page of our website. That means whenever
we type in URL, local host for press, this page will open up. What I would like
to do is we can just change the home right here. We can give this
something like blog, the one which we have
as our element, or 58. We can change that to a. Let me just quick edit this and we can change this to home. All right, let's also
change this to home. This is the URL slug, and this is the title
of your web page. Let's update. Let's
go back to our menu. Right here in the
appearance section, you'll find menus in
side menus First, obviously we would like
to show up the home page, then the about, and
then the block page, and the contacts page. All right, now let's
save the menu. First of all, we'll
save the menu. This menu is just for the arrangement of
all the periods that we have in our website. Just like how we used block theme customizer to
customize our header and navigation bar to change
the background color and align our logo, the buttons. And we saw many
different things. Something similar
can be done with Element or Pro plug in
right here inside pages. I'll add few more pages and we'll give this
as a block title. Let's give this something
like block number two. All right. First of all, this is not actually a page. Rather it should be a post. Let's give this as a post
and we'll add one more post. Or rather what we already have. Two post, Hello
World and blog one. Let's edit the title. Okay, we can edit this
something like blog two. All right, I'll update this. We'll go back to
our dashboard here. You can see we have block two. Okay. We can change
the ural slug as well. Let's change this to blog two. Fine, let's update this. What are we going to do? Let
me just quick edit this. Okay, this looks good. Let's update even
in the ural slug. I'll just keep this as blog one. All right, let's update
now what I'm going to do, I'll just go back to my menus, appearance menus, right here
in the view all section. I might also post inside pages. You won't find the blog post, you'll have to go to
the post section. Here, you'll find
block 1.2 Let's add them and make it
part of your blog. We can have a drop down menu. Whenever someone hovers
around the block, they will find block
one and block two. All right, let's save the
menu. What are we going to do? We'll go back to
our address website to see if the changes
are visible or not. Here you can see we have
blog one, block two. But we would like to customize this header using elementor. We'll go back, we'll
go to template, right? In templates you will
have Save Templates, Theme Builder, and
many other stuff. Let's click on Theme Builder. Right here in the Theme Builder, you would find an option
to edit your header. Let's click on Edd. Once you
click on that first it will prompt you to choose between different pre met templates
made by limit or plugin. But we would like to
build it from scratch. Let's just cross this out here, you'll find a blank
area to work around. Let's add a flex box
with two columns here. We'll have one container
and the other container. Now let's add a logo here. When you click on
the Add Element, you'll find few elements which
are part of your header. It is recommended to make use of these as your element or header. Here you have the site
logo, site title, page title, press menu,
search form, site map. Let's first make use
of our site logo. Now, site logo is visible
right here as you can see. But since the background
color is not dark, the text is not
visible for the logo. We'll just click
on our container, the entire flex box. We'll go to the style tab. We'll change the
background color to black. Let's just change
the color to black. Once we have done
this, you'll find that our image appears way too large. We'll just click on this image. We'll go to Style. And
we'll change the width. But let me just keep this as 40% and we'll
align this left. All right, now inside
this container, we'll also add a
navigation menu. Let's add our tress menu
when I search for menu. First of all, let me
just explain that. Press menu. We have menu anchor and all those
different kinds of things. But we might also
see something like, let's just make
use of press menu. I'm going to place it right
inside this container. All right, by default, the container direction
has been set to vertical. Let's change this to horizontal. This is how it appears, but this is not
exactly what we want. You can see that these
elements are appearing. In a stacked format.
But if we want that logo and our
menu appears in line, then what should we
do in that case? Obviously, they should
be part of a container. The container direction
should be set to horizontal. What we need to work on
this is this part here, the image resolution
is set to full. We can change this to other
or else we can go to style. We can change the width of it. And we can change the
width of this thing. The site logo itself. The site logo, which we
have right here first, let me just drop it down
to about this part. I can change the width of the other container
that we have right here. I can just make use of this 56% Let me just make this as 57 would be good enough for the
other container. Right here we have two elements but the site logo
appears way too smaller. What are we going
to do in that case? We'll go to Advanced. We'll see, okay here this width is for the
size of the site logo. We want this to appear
by about 22% but when we go inside the image
for the site logo image, we can increase the width
to over 100% Also fine. Once we have done this,
you can align this center. All right, so it's not working. Despite me clicking on center, it won't adjust it
because the size of, the size of the site
logo is maximum. It's occupying the maximum
width according to the site logos width here, what we can do in this case
is you can just go to style. We can click on the
container and here we can Justify content center
and a line items center. This is exactly how
they will appear. I hope you get the
point and now you understand how Flex
Box actually works. All right, here we
have the site logo. Here we have our menu and menu. You'll find that the text
appears blue in color. Let's change this to white
by going to the style. You'll have normal
hover, and active. We'll change the color to
white for all three states. Okay? Also, Okay. By default, hover doesn't have any state. And even for active, it
doesn't have any state. So let's just keep it as it is. And inside the other
container, what do we want? We want that whenever the user. So right now we are making this header using
element or page builder. Correct. And we are
trying to build the header responsive
as we go along. Fine. This part of the container will be displayed
on desktop screens, whereas the other part
of the container will be shown on mobile
and tablet devices. All right, specifically I
would say mobile because on mobile devices you'll
see a hamburger icon. And once someone clicks on it, the hamburger icon will expand into showing
up the entire menu. Fine, we'll add
something similar. Let's make a duplicate of this. After making duplicate again, just drag and drop
it right here. Fine, now we have done this, but I would like to place
the menu towards the end. That means contact should
touch towards the right, and the home should be
somewhere right here. We can just click on the
Tres menu right here. You'll have layout
for the drop down. Here you have vertical,
horizontal, drop down. Let's see what happens if we
have drop down initially. Also, even on desktop mode, you'll see the hamburgeron
when someone clicks on it, you'll find this an option. Now this by default whether you're using
the dropdown or not, whenever you are using
your mobile display, you'll see a hamburgeronine.
Let's go back here. We'll make use of horizontal and we'll make this
alignment to the right. Align your entire
tress menu to right. Fine. If you stretch along, then this will
occupy space that it has padding from
right and left also, but let's just keep
it towards the right. Fine. Now, what we exactly
want inside this container. Okay, inside this container, we want a few more things. First and foremost, you can
see we have a page title, you have the site title, you have search form, you have site map, you have page title and all those different
kinds of things. You can also work around
different parts that you have. For this, we can
search for you box, you'll find list,
you'll find an icon. We're going to make
use of icon can list. But there is also
one thing that I would like to make use
of which is search form. First, let's make
use of search form. I'll just drag and
drop this right here and make sure this
is part of the container. Fine it, let's add
a new element. We can give this something like icon box right above the search. And I'll just quickly show the reason why we
are making use of the icon box right here. You'll find that we have this text working hours
Monday to Friday, 08:00 A.M. to 06:00 P.M. Right. We can make use of something like this.
We can delete the icon. We don't want the icon
but rather we would like to make use of the
title and description. We can say working hours or we could type
something like Monday. To Friday, so fry. All right. Below that we can keep
AM to 06:00 P.M. Fine. You can see right here we can add some spacing between 08:00 A.M. and
06:00 P.M. hyphen. Here we have the
spacing correct. Let's go to style and change the content text color to white. Title color has been
changed to white and needs to be done for
description as well. All right, now the typography, both of them needs to
be set to poppins, because we want to
maintain the consistency throughout our entire web page. All right, for this also, we would like to keep
this as Poppins. Let's search for Poppins. Fine. For both of these
title and description, Poppins has been applied. Let's try to drop down the
font size to about 25 pixels. I think 25 pixels
would look good. We could drop it down
more to about 20 pixels. 20 pixels looks good. Here we can make
use of 15 pixels. I think 15 pixels would
look more than enough. All right, the spacing. Also you can play around
with the letter spacing, word spacing, line height,
but I'm not going to do it. Here we have the box and we can change the alignment
of it as well. We can change this to
right line so that it appears and touches towards the right corner coming to
this drop down the spacing. Initially it had
about this spacing, but we have drop
it down to zero. All right, now we
have done this part. What are the thing
we are left with? We want to add an icon as well. We will add one icon. There is an element in element or free version which
is called icon. Now this icon can be used to
make use of site knife bar, which we'll look into later on. When we click on the kebab icon, what I'm trying to do
is I'm trying to import the kebab icon or
the three dots icon. Mostly you'll find
on, you'll find inside applications
where you have the three dots in vertical
format called as menu. It is also called as kebab or it is also
called as ellipses. Let's search for ellipsis icon. Here you have the vertical
version and horizontal. I'll just make use of
the horizontal one. And I can change the color of this primary color
needs to be white. I can change the sizing of this. Also, I think about 30 pixels would look more than enough. All right, if you have
used vertical ellipsis, you can even play
around the rotation to set this as horizontal
by just changing the rotation degree to 180
and it will properly change it to, or maybe 90. I think if it's vertical
you changes to 90, so it will become horizontal. All right, here you have
all these different things. Let's also align
this towards, right? We want all three
elements to be in line. What I mean by in line, in line basically means
that all those contents, whenever we switch between
different devices, they should appear
in one single line. All right, what are
we going to do? We'll go to Advanced right here. In Advanced, you'll find
position to be absolute fixed, which we are not going to
touch but rather the width. We will set this to in line
auto for this element. Will do that advanced
width in line auto for the last element also we'll go to width and in line auto. Now that we have
done all this part, the one thing which I feel needs to be changed is for this menu. And this menu right here, we have the font
style as default. Let's change this to pop
ins that our pops up. Okay, we can also change
the sizing of it. If I change the sizing to, let me just drop it down to
15 pixels would look good. Let's keep this as 15 pixels. I can even change this to bold. Bold doesn't work. Let's see how it looks like
a medium. Medium looks good. Poppins 15 pixels and medium
weight is what we are going to apply right here
Instead, I can just copy. I can paste the
styling right here. What change I need to make
is I need to write a line. This, by just going to
this, I can write a line. Now I have all the
fonts right here in my header or navigation
bar as poppins, with the same font size and
same font weight. All right. Now one thing coming to
the search bar, I can, we have discussed earlier
on that search is really used to browse
between different products, different block, post, all
those stuff that you have. Now when we click on the
search bar, the search form, you'll find different
skins that you have. This is the classic format where there is a search bar and outside the search bar you have the separate button
for your search icon. If you keep this as minimal, then the search icon will
be inside your search bar. All right, if you keep
this as full screen, you'll only be able to
see the search icon. And once someone clicks
on the search icon, the entire with
the entire screen will be taken up to search. Different block, post,
different services and different products that you're
selling on your website. Fine, so you have
different kinds of things. You can play around
the alignment, you can change the
size of your icon. Let me just close this for now. Here you'll see
the toggle button. If I play around the size, you'll see the sizing
of the icon changes. I can make this as something. What's the size
of this? The size of the is set to
about 30 pixels, so we can do something similar. 30, 30 looks way too small. Let's just make it fortify. All right, let's align
this towards right, change the color to white Here. You'll also find
input and you'll find other toggle input. When you work around the input, what happens when you
click on the button? This is the part whenever you
change the color of this, maybe let's just say red. You can see the full screen
background color changes. Right now, we would like
to keep this as default. We can change the
typography to poppins to maintain the consistency
throughout our entire website. We can change the text
color if you want. What happens if you
change the text color? You can see the search text
which is written right here. It changes. You can even change the border
color right here. If I change the border color, you'll find that the divider
right here will change fine. We want to change the
color of the icon. Let's just cross this out. Instead of having this gray, we'll keep the color of the
toggle button to white. We can change this to white. All right. We can even
add some border to this. We can add. All right, let's give this something here. What I was actually trying
to explain the size, which you can see right here. This size appears to be the entire size of
your search form. If you particularly just want to work around the size
of your toggle, you can do that by
going to the style, going to the toggle, and
then changing the icon. Okay, the size right here, you can play around with it. Fine, I can just make it
something like 50 pixels. I can add border
width initially. Whenever you play around the
slider for border width, you will see that surrounding
your icon is in box format, You can change this
to border radius so that it appears
in circular format. Let's just keep the
border width to be a two. I think two would look
good, border radius to be, once you're going past 24, it appears in circular. Despite you going 83605000,
it doesn't make a difference. We can just keep this as 35 just to make sure that
we have a round circle. And we'll drop down
the size icon. See what happens right here. If I change on size, the border radius itself, the border surrounding the on, it doesn't actually compress. It's because the content
itself, size is 45. If I drop it down to
about 35 something, which we have done
for this ellipsis, Also we can play around
with it to style, icon size will be
increased to about 50. This looks pretty good. Fine, we have all these things
now just to make sure that all three things
that we have right here should appear
in one container. Let's also add one
more container. Inside the outer container, I'm going to add a container, which we have right
here. Let's place it. And I'll try to place all the items inside
this container, fine. Inside this container,
we have two elements. Let's also the third element. Fine, we'll go to the container, we'll change the
direction to horizontal. Here you'll find that all three of them appear in
one single line. It's an inline format, but we want all three elements
to appear at the end. We can justify the content. You can find space between
space around and space even. We'll just change this to end. We can align the items here. You'll find that this
icon appears at the top. This also at the top, but since this has a title
and description, it occupies the entire
height of your container. We can just change the alignment of this to center so that it
appears like this. Or you can even
change this to end so that it will appear
at the bottomost part. But let's just keep
this as center. And this would look
good in my opinion. Fine. Here's how you have
worked around different things, but there is few more
things left to do. First of all, this menu that we have right here will
go to Advanced. We'll select Responsiveness. We'll hide this on mobile. Let's see how it looks like
on tablet and desktop. This is how it looks
like on desktop. For this particularly,
we would like to hide it on desktop and
mobile. Let's go to responsive. We'll hide this on
tablet and desktop mode, fine, but it should
be visible on mobile. All right, let's
go to mobile view. And here you won't find this. Although this is visible
because we are the admin, we are actually building our website so we can
see all the elements. But when we are
actually previewing, then you wouldn't find this particular element,
hamburger icon. You'll find only this one.
Once you click on this, you'll find this kind
of a dropdown option and all those kinds of
things will show up. Dropdown right here for mobile device will
be a click here. You can't hover because you are using a touchscreen device. You can't hover
around the elements. You have to click on it
so that a dropdown menu will come up Fine.
Let's cross it out. You can change the
hamburger icon also by just going
to style here. You'll find toggle button and
you can change the color of this two white fine so
that it is visible. You can even change the
position of it right here. You can even make this as
right align by just going. Alignment is set to right fine. We don't need to worry about it. But for this part
where we have this for our mobile device
particularly, we can go to layout. We can go to style. Here, we'll find the
width of the image. You can even change the width of your icon box, site logo. The element is called a
site logo. You can do that. You can even change
the max width on all those different
kinds of things, but we'll just keep it as it is. See how it looks like on tablet and how it looks
like on desktop. On desktop, it
looks really good. I hope you guys
enjoyed this lecture. Once you publish the header, you will be prompted to add
condition for this header. That means whether you want to apply the style settings for your header menu throughout your entire website or
to particular pages. Let's just keep this as entire
site and we'll save close. All right, I think that was all from my
side for this lecture.
11. Build Custom Footer & 404 Error Page: All right, now that you
have seen and understood how to build the header
using element or pro, let's also see how
we can make use of the plug in to build our
footer and the 44 error page. We'll go back to our
templates Theme Builder in the Tres dashboard and we'll get an option
to choose the footer. Now the background of this, the element or might
change from white to black depending on the time when
you're using accordingly, it will change it to
dark mode or light mode. Right now we haven't
built any footer, so it's showing us plank but at the top right you'll
find add new button. We can just click over there and it will prompt us different
templates that we have. Now we can build it from
scratch, doesn't matter, but I think it would
take us a lot of time to build it from scratch. You have already seen how to
build header from scratch. Pretty much same things are
applied for footer as well. Let's just bring this
template for footer. I'll just show you around that the things are pretty same, no difference as such, you can even change
the elements, You have other elements
that you can add. Right here you have some
pro elements which doesn't make sense to add in the header and footer like your look grid, loop, Carousol, whatever is there in the site
and the layout part only that makes
sense to be added right here in the
footer or even header. Or maybe let's just say
basic for that matter. If you would like to
add some Google Maps at the footer, that
is a good practice. I would recommend always that if you're trying to attract
a local clients and local customers and
you want to show up your office space or
your business space. You can just list down the location by with the help of this Google Maps
element inside your footer. That would be a great,
great example to show. You can change the
background again, the styling layout,
container, advanced section. All these things are pretty same which we have already
seen in the previous lecture. I hope you get the point
about using the footer. You can even change
the social icons here. You can add different icons
and different social links. Right now it is giving us what press you can
change the icon. Let's just say from what press to maybe let's say Instagram. You can just change
it to Instagram. You can insert the icon, you can paste the link or URL of your Instagram
profile page, and you can adjust the
width of them as well. The spacing between the
Facebook and Twitter is because there is an undefined
social icon right here. You can just remove
and you'll find that the spacing between all of these icons are
evenly distributed. If you would like to add
some more gap between them, you can just go to
the styling section. You can add amongst them. You can add some gap border and all those different kinds of functionalities available. All right, so I hope
you get the point. I'll just publish for now. I'll add in condition
that this kind of footer will be applied to
the entire website. Just save and close. Now let's look at the
44 error page again, we'll go to the Theme Builder. That was a quick shortcut to go back to the
Theme Builder again. Rather than going to
the we press dashboard. What does 44 error page mean? So whenever someone, let's just say you have
completed building your entire website on
your local host system and now you would like to put your website from your system to a hosting service, right? So basically you're
trying to make your website live in
public on Internet, so whenever someone
types your doing URL followed by forward
slash and then the page. Now if someone makes
typo error in the URL, then what should
happen where the user should be redirected
to, will allow, or will you give that kind of an experience to your user that it just shows a simple
Chrome error four or four, that the page, something
like this was not found. It won't be a good
experience, right? It's better to just build a
custom page which will show that hey user had some
typo error in your error. Or maybe just make
sure that you're clicking on the
correct URL and it will react to the page where
you intend to go over there. We can just go to
the addnew button. Maybe it's not just
typo error always, It's also about sometimes
the broken links. Let's just say you
updated a website a month ago and there is a page, let's say a block page. You changed the URL
for block page. You as the admin
changed the URL of the blog and your home page
had a few buttons which was reacting to the URL of
that block page with the earlier URL
that you had that is making a broken
link in your website. In that scenario, 44 error
pages can come in handy. And also in terms of
SEO, Google, Bing, and other search engines support and recommend website owners to make use of the
44 error pages to give an authentic
experience to your users. You can make use of some
pre built templates. You can make even
changes around it. Or we have some
template right here. I can just insert this one. Even take a look at it. I can just click on the on
the plus magnifying icon. Just to get an overview of how this 44 error page
would look like, I can just click on
the folder icon. I can make use of
this one Insert. Let's see how it looks like. This is exactly how we
want our users to show. 44, the page we're looking
for does not exist. And back to home, right here, you would like to link
them back to your website. So you can just make
use of your home page. So I can just make
use of the home page. So whenever someone
clicks on this button, they will be redirected
to your home page. Fine in the background,
you can add an image. You can maybe even
add some animations, which will cover on later
on this course, right? So animations,
background color may be changing the
font style and you know the color of
the fonts may be changing the border
of the buttons. All these things are
subject to your design and your consistency of the theme
that you are following. So it's up to you
whatever you can do. I'm just showing you all
that what are the features that element or theme
builder provides. So I hope you get the point. In the next lecture,
we'll see how we can make use of the pre
loaders in Elementor.
12. Preloader & Page Transitions - Animations Finally!: Let's see how we can make use of page loaders and transitions. Right here in the
element or pro, you'll find a feature. First of all, we'll need
to go to dashboard. Once you go to the press Dashboard right in the
element or settings, you'll need to go
to the feature tab and scroll down to the
part where you would find, where you would find something
called a wait a second. Where is it? It was right here. Page transitions right here. By default it would be set to active, but for some reason, if you can't see this
green dot right here, you can just click on Active and scroll down and
save the changes. Now what essentially it
will allow you to do is whenever you are going
from one page to another, there will be some loading
screen showing on your screen. That will happen because
you're using page loaders and transitions which are
elementor pro features. Let's try to edit our
website with element. Or here we can see
this icon, right? This is called as Site
Settings. We can click on here. Now once you scroll down, you'll find an option
called As Page Transitions. Let's click on it. And here you would find
different options. Here you can choose the
classic background or gradient background
for your page loading. Whenever you click
on another page, there will be some
background overlay going around and it could be a
classic or gradient one, let's give it a gradient, we'll use white color and
the other as green color, we'll make use of
the green color that we have right here. We can make use of
this color sampler. You can see the dropper
just comes up and the dropper could be placed where we would like to
fetch the color code. Fine, sometimes it might not
work, but sometimes it does. Here you can see this
green color pops up. All right, this is
the second color. The color for the first
color which we have, white is location is set to zero and the
second is set 200. Now you must be knowing about
how the gradient effect works because we have covered
that earlier as well. Right here we have
different angles. Also, we can make it
linear or radial, but let's just
keep it as linear. Now we have entrance animation. How do we want to show
up the animation, whether you want to be fade in or you want it
to be fade down. Fade in, right. Fade in up. But I think fading down
would look really good. Let's keep this as fading down. You can even choose
exit animation, like fade out down, like this. For exit animation, we can
just keep this as none because the animation
won't last forever. If your page is loading hardly, it will take about
a second or a two. There is some
animation duration. You can keep this as short as, Okay, let's just keep this. 1,500 or 15 50. Now this value is in
milliseconds, not seconds. Here you have this.
You can preview your pace transition by
clicking on this icon. Once you preview
this, you'll see that this is how the
animation works. You can even drop it down. Let's see how it
works. There might be some delay going around. We can even work on it. We
can click on Preloader. Preloader would
be of many types. That means whether you want to show any animation
at the center, you can see there is some
spinner going around. Let me just increase the size of the spinner so it would
be visible to you. All you can see there
is some spinner. You could change the
animation type to circle dashed like this,
like bouncing dots. You could even change
this to pulse, you could even change this
to spinners like this, depending on your use case. Let's just keep this
circle dashed circle. I think circle would
look really good. We can make the size
to be about 150. I think 150 would look good. Let's just keep this as 150. All right. You can
change the color of your spinner as well
by going to this part. You can change the
color of the spinner. Okay, but I would like
to keep this as white. You can add delay if you want, but it doesn't make
sense to add delay. Honestly, you can even make the duration and so that
it doesn't last forever. Here you have different
options to choose between. Preloader, whether you want some animation or you
want to show up an icon. What happens if I
make use of an icon? Let's say I have uploaded my own icons or I'm going to make use
of my own libraries. Icon needs to be of SVG format. First of all, you could
even make use of the font. Awesome icons. Those
are really great. You can see there
is some spinner. There is other options as well. What happens if we
choose the spinner which is the, by default one? Let's insert them here. You can add animation
to this icon. If you have your custom
icon also, you can spin it. You could even bounce it, You could even flash it. There are so many
different options you can play around with and
see what works for you. But for now, I would
just keep this as animation if you want, You can even make
use of an image. Let's see what happens if
I make use of this icon. Okay, I have this icon, I can choose
different animations instead of making use of an SVG. If you just have a PNG or a
Web or a JP format of image, you can make use of
it as a preloader. Here you can bounce, you can see right here,
this is how it can appear. Here you can place
your site logo or the site icon
which you have used. Let's just keep this as none. All right, let's
save the changes. I'm not going to make
use of this image, rather I would make use of the animation which we
have right here. Save this, we'll go back. Let's see if we can
preview the changes. As you saw when the
website was loading the preloader and
the transition was also showing up the green, an effect was page transition but the animation
was pre loaded. I hope you understood about
those two concepts and minded where you felt that
these two options are available only for the
element or pro login. That won't be available
for the free version.
13. Mega Menu - It's Different!: The next feature that I'm
going to discuss with you all is the
Mega Menu Builder. Let's get back to our template section in the Wordpress Dashboard
Theme Builder. It is important for us to have a custom header in our
Wordpress website. We'll just go over here, which we built previously. We'll edit this part. Right here we were using the Wordpress
menu as the element. Now just to demonstrate how
the mega menu Builder works, we'll have to remove
this for now. I'm going to delete
this. I will add a new element called
as just a menu. Okay, one more thing. I would not see the
menu right here. Just because we'll have to
go back to our dashboard. Press dashboard right here. I'll have to go back to
Element, or Settings. In the Settings. In
the features stab. I'll scroll down to the
part where I can find menu. Now by default it
won't be activated. We'll have to activate this. Now we'll go back to our
templates Theme Builder. We'll select our header
and we'll rit it. Now when we'll browse through different
elements that we have, the different blocks
that we have, we will find menu, you
can see right here. Let's just delete this one. This was not saved earlier, that's why the Wordpress menu
was displayed right here. We'll just place inside our
container besides this logo. Right now the text
is in black color. We'll need to change
the font color to white and also the
typography to Poppins. Poppins is what we
are going to save. Fine. Coming back to
the content over here, we'll have home page
which will link to our elementor page 25. We will have the next section which will be an about page. It will link to the
about page, obviously. Let's search for the about us. The third item that we
have is the contact page. Contact page. Let's link our
contact page right here. Lastly, just to demonstrate
the working of Mega Menu, we will create a new title. Let's just give this something
as something like team. All right, then you can
see there's a toggle, a switch right here which
says drop down content. We'll toggle this,
you can find that a drop down menu is
shown besides the team. Now one thing I can notice right here is that
whenever we bring cursor around any of
the page menu items, we can see that upon hover, the text color changes to
somewhat light degree. We don't want that to
happen because then the font wouldn't be visible. We'll go to ho, we'll change
the font color to active. Again, how to white color
again for the active. We'll set this to white. For all the three states
we have white color fine. Now let's try to adjust the width of this such that all the four contents get
aligned in the same space. Okay, In typography itself, let's just try to make things
work around the font size. About 14 pixels is
helping us right here, we'll just keep it 14 pixels. As we click on the steam,
you can find that, we can create a new
drop down menu. This is a mega menu, right? I can click on the plus icon. Can bring four columns, four different containers
In each container, we can put up element, let's just put up an element of, let's just say an
image, an image box. I'll just search for image box. I'll place it right here. I'll remove the
description part. We don't want that.
We'll just make use of title and the image right
here in the library. I have four images. They are approximately
the same size. Or what else we can do is
instead of using the image box, because the email box
would make sense, where we want to
include an icon or a logo and followed
by some text which represents why that icon
is there in our web page. In our case here, right now, we are displaying all
the team members who are part of this business over here. Including a image element and a separate title element
would make a lot of sense. I'll just delete this
for now and I'll go to the basic image. I'll choose the
image right here. I'll also insert a heading tag right below this
part. All right? I can give a name something
like, hi John here. All right. Examination mark. That's pretty much about
it. That's how I do it. And I will just duplicate
this for four other items. All right. Four containers. And the other containers, I'll just delete them
so that spacing is such that you can find that we initially
had four containers. We duplicate of
them and whatever the blank empty
containers were there, we deleted them right
here in the image. We'll change the image quickly. Right here again, we need to
change the image right here. We'll change the
image to the sky. All right. We can change
the text as well or maybe. Okay. I think font
color is good enough. I think black would suit
with a white background. But if you'd like to
change the background for this, you can even do that. For that I'll need to just click on the entire
container with. All right. I'll just need to
click on the container width and make sure that
I am inside the team. If I click on the team,
you can find that this is the menu and I can change the
background color as well. I hope you get the point.
Something similar can be done for all the different
containers that we have. You can even change
the flex box settings and add a few of the things
that you would like, whether you want to embed
a video image or Ju file, whatever you would like
to include right here. I think this functionality could come in handy
when you have a lot of items which you want
your users to navigate to, but you simply cannot list down all of them in a single
main row of your header. By using the functionality
of Mega Menu, you can make use of this kind of a layout to help you achieve what you actually
intended to do.
14. Loop Grid for Blog Posts & Products - Intro to Dynamic Content: Right, Let's look
into one more feature which is called as Loop Builder. We'll just click on
Edit with Elementor. As soon as we click here, you'll find different pieces that you can navigate
around with. But what we have to go
back to Theme Builder, we'll click on the
Theme Builder. You would find different
options right here. Let's click on Loop Item. Now when exactly the
loop item come in handy, let's say you're building a e commerce website or
you have multiple blogs, or you have multiple
products services and you want to show some of dynamic content in a card format at the
home page of your website. Then in that case loop
item could come in handy. Here you have some pre built
templates that you can use, but we're going to
build it from scratch. Let's just close this out. Since this is a pro feature, you'll require element
or pro plug in. All right, here you have a
section to add your loop grid. Let's click on the plus item. And it will give
you an option to choose Flex box or grid. So let's just choose Flexbox. We'll make use of the
vertical direction. As soon as we click
on the Add element, you'll see a few recommended
options which is post title, post post content, featured
image and post info. First, let me show you
what other features we have and how many different blog posts
have we created so far. What I'll do, I'll just
go back to the home page. If I click on Blog One, this is how the blog
one looks like. You can see we have the title. This is the excerpt content. All right, this is the image. Now this is not a featured
image. This is just an image. Here we have the, the
body at the bottom. I've added a tag to this blog. Here you'll find social
icons that people can share and comment
section area. You can even see that how
my block two looks like. Here you have block
to the image content. Here you have again hashtag and a comment left by
what? Press commentor. All right, so we have
these two things. Let's go back to
our Lue grid now. I can just place my
feature image first. Whether you're working around your product page or you want to display and showcase
different products that you sell or different
block posts that you have. You need to have some cards on the home page so that
users can navigate to. Right, featured
image will display the image that you have set for that
particular block post. All right, below that, we can add a title
for our block post. This is like a dynamic content. The entire section, the
entire container flex box that we have made
so far is dynamic. It basically means that it will autopopulate the featured image, the title, depending
on how many blocks, how many products, how
many pages you have. And it will automatically
fill the data in it. Right now, you just have to
design it once and it will be replicated for
multiple post block, post, multiple product
pages and so on. So here you have
the block title. Below this, we can add
our blog or post excerpt. It basically means that what
the content is all about. Then let's add another element
which is post content. This will display the entire content which we do not want. Then we have the
post information. Let's just scroll down
to the part where we can place information. Now once you make use
of this post info, you'll find different options, author, date, time,
and comments. Now time doesn't make sense,
we'll just remove it. We'll just keep date so that
it will show that, okay, this blog is latest, the content is fresh, and there are so many comments. Right now, it doesn't
have any comments. So you'll see no comments. But you'll find that where
exactly this was published. And by whom? Right now the user name that I'm
working around with is admin. But you can change this
to whatever you have. Other things that we require
in this is a button. Let's add a button also. I have a button, I'll
place it right here. I would like to place
the post information right below the title. Here you can see
who posted this, when exactly was it posted, and how many comments has
been left to this block post. Fine, we can center line the content and
coming to this part. First of all, let's work
around the image first. The image that we
have right here, let's align its center. You can see the featured
image right here. It's a dynamic content. We'll go to the
style. We'll change the width of the image to about 50% Only 50% of the area should be
covered up with our image. Whatever width we have
for our entire container. This is like an image element. Inside the image element, we have the image itself. Right? 50% of the image width. Fine. Once we go to
this advanced tab, you'll find different options to work around, but
we do not have to. Here we have the block title. Here, you can align this center. You can change the
typography to poppins. Let's choose poppins
For this also, we can center align. We can change the
size and color. Also, instead of choosing
the text color to blue, we can make this as black and change the
typography to poppins. Let me just do that. Poppins
is what I'm going to select. Fine. Now, coming to
this except part, now you can see the except for this particular block
post is way too big. Now, it might not
be the same case for all the other block post. What we can do right here for the excerpt we can go to style. You have different options. First, let's try to center line, You'll find In Content. Once we click on this, you'll find Settings option. Once you click on this
tool on the wench icon, you can see you'll find to
choose the excerpt length. If you keep this as ten, neither first ten words
will be displayed. You can even drop it
down to something like five or five wouldn't display
the entire information. Let's just keep this as 15. 15 would be good enough. We have selected 15 words. Just display the first 15 words. All right, now we
have the button. Let's centerline the button. We can also change the text, something like read more. All right. Read more. We can make this. As you can see, there are
different types of buttons. Default button is gray
color Info button is usually blue in color
or T light blue color. Then you have success,
which is green color. Then you have warning, which is yellow color and
yellow or orange, and danger is in red color. But let's just keep it
default and we'll change the color to about green, which we have saved
as our global color. Here you have the text color which will keep this as white. We'll change the color of
our button background. We have saved this as green. That's what we are
using right now. Yep, that's pretty
much about it. You can even change the size of this and you can link this. Now whenever someone
clicks on this button, we want the user to
be redirected to the particular blockpost or
a particular product page. If we are actually manually entering the link,
then what will happen? No matter how many
blockpost you have, no matter how many
products you have, those items will displayed
in a lubrid format. But whenever someone
clicks on the button, they will be redirected to the same link because you're
hard coding the link. We don't want that to happen. We want the link to
be dynamic as well. We can just click on
this icon right here, which is dynamic tags. And you can select the post URL. Just select post URL. And whenever someone
clicks on it, block post would open up. All right, right here, we can select the
entire container. We can add some border to this. What you can see the
spacing around is not that great what we can do. First, let's try to add
some border to this. I'll just go to layout. I'll see in style, actually we'll find
border in border, we would find a solid one. Let's keep the border width from all the
directions to be one. Let's just keep this as one.
See how it would look like. This is how it
looks. Let's change the color of this
border to green. I'm going to go, I'll
change the color to green. I'll click on the
globconl Green. This is how it looks like, but let's also increase
the width of, we want the border to
be a little bit fat. Click on border
will make this two. Let's see, two works
great in our case. You can even add border radius
to make the rounded edges, but I would keep it as it is. Let's select the entire section. In this section, what I want is we want some
spacing between them. Let's go to Container Advanced. Here you would find layout. We can change the, can
even change the height. Let's change the height of
this to about 06:55 All right, 655 looks good, but 655
would be really big. Let's drop it down
to about 16:16. Looks good, Right here in 610, we can justify the
content center and we can align items center. All right, we can add
some gap between them. Let's add some gap between
the elements to about 30. This is how it looks like. I think this looks pretty good. Let's publish this. Coming
back to the home page, we can go back to
home page right here. Can just select right
here in the home page. I can just scroll
down to the part where wherever I want to make use of this
particular loop grid, I can just add my
loop grid right here. I can just click on, I'll just
click on the Ad template. Or you know what, I don't need to navigate between
different templates, I just need to click on plus flex box, Horizontal direction. That means align all the cards
in horizontal direction. And let's add element
which will be Loop grid. All right, let's drag and drop
our loop grid right here. Now we need to give a
name to this Loukrid, but we did not give a
name to the Lukrid. Let's go to the Theme Builder. Once you go to the
Theme Builder, you'll find loop
items right here, you'll find loop item. Now we need to change
the name of this. Let's edit this by clicking
on the preview button. You'll find an
option to edit this. Here you can click on the three
dots and click on Rename. Here you can give this
something like blog post card. All right. Just click on Change. You can see the loop item
name has been changed. Let's close this. Here
we can start typing out blog postcard template. You will find that this is
how our loop grid appears. You can see this is for blog
one, this is for block two. Let's publish them and
let's see how it appears. All right, once I preview the changes, let's
see how it looks like. If I scroll down, you
can just click on this. Blog one will appear, but it's not appearing
on the next page. This is about blog one. If I click on this button, you can see block two appears. All right, I hope you get
the point about using the loop grid and loop items
in your Adress website.
15. Custom CSS for Added Functionality - Strictly for Professionals!: Guys, I'm very excited for
this lecture because we're going to explore a really
cool feature in Elementor. As you can see, I am on the
home page of my website. Here we have the hero section using the custom
CSS functionality. We're going to add
a cool animation going around in the background
of our hero section, and you'll find that a few of the icons will be in
a floating motion. Let's get back to our
elementor settings. Here I have the hero section. Now each and every section, or every element,
whenever you click on it, you'll find an advanced tab. Now below the advanced tab, you'll find a custom CSS option. Here you can write your own
custom, custom CSS code. You can even write it
with the help of the AI, which element or provides
within the element itself. Here you can add the CSS. Now if you have gone through my full stack web
development course, where we have a
dedicated section for the entire CSS part, you must have learned about it. But even though you don't know
anything about CSS still, you can look up on Google and find few animation which
are written in CSS. Let's add few images. I'm going to add one
image to this container. Let me just change the image to this block, the globe icon. All right, here I
have the globe icon. I'll go to the style and I will change the width of this image. Right now, the size of the
image is way too large. I'm just going to drop
it down to about 18. Yeah, I think 18
would be good enough. Now, again, we'll go to
the advanced section. We'll go to the part
where we have position. Now you'll find three options, default, absolute, and fixed.
Now what does it mean? Default basically means that wherever you put your element in a particular container of a flex box or maybe even a grid, the element will stay within
that container itself. No matter how much scroll you do at the top
or at the bottom, the position of the
element wouldn't change. But if I change this to
something like an absolute, what happens is that I have
the flexibility to control where the image can be placed
in the center section. That's what I can do with
absolute. What if I have fixed? Let me just also show
you what happens if I have something like fixed. I can just select this
image as fixed position. In the advanced tab, I can select the
position to be fixed. And what happens
if I scroll down? You can see the image stays
at the fixed position. That's what your fixed
position actually mean here, we can just change
it back to default. I'll also add one more image right here in this container. I'll choose the image
to be this icon. We'll go to the style, change this to about 18. Width to be at about 18. That would be good
enough. We'll change the absolute once we do it, I think the position of
these two elements are good. Now here I have this
particular element in the custom CSS part. I'll paste this code. Just to explain briefly what
this animation is all about, you can find that we created an animation called as float
using the key frames tag. Inside this, we
have placed that at the 0% That means at the
start of the animation, you need to translate to the
position at zero pixels, when it is 50% when it is
halfway through the animation, you have to translate with
respect to the position. You must have learned
about translations and transformations
in mathematics. That same concept is applied
right here in CSS animation. So basically you're
transforming your image, and you're moving the
position with respect to the X axis to 20 pixels. So at the half way
of the animation, the image is being moved towards 20 pixels with respect
to the X axis. And it is also moving to 50 pixels with respect
to the Y axis. And it is rotating
in the Z axis. So here we have the Y axis, here we have the X axis, and there is also a Z axis, which is pointing right
towards the camera. So this is the z axis. All right, here we
have the z axis. It is also rotating,
and there is a scaling, that means scale, that means
reduce down or enlarge. If I have 0.7 that
means drop down the size and make sure that you're
scaling down the image. 2.7 Here we have the
degrees, 13 degrees. When the transformation
is complete, translate the y to, again translate with
respect to the y axis, again to the zero pixels. All right, I hope we
get the point here. We select the animation float, which we created right here. We want the entire duration of the animation to run
for about 20 seconds. Here we have different
motion effect which could be linear
or ease ease out. That means the
animation start and the animation end
should be smooth. We want this animation to
run infinitely in a loop. That's what it basically mean. Let's apply the same settings, the same custom CSS to this
particular element as well. And once I save this, let me show you how
it would look like. We can click on View
Preview Changes, You'll find that this animation is going around in
our Hero section. Doesn't that look so good? If we even scroll down, you can find that the animation will be going on
in the background. Since the animation duration
is about 20 seconds, you'll see that animation is happening very
smoothly, very slowly. But it looks so cool
and so soothing. I hope you guys
enjoyed this lecture. You can go creazy with CSS and make a few
animation effects. Or maybe even add some
custom gradient colors or change around the settings of your existing elements
in your website.
16. Popup Forms to Collect Email Address of Users - Very Important!: All right guys, let's see how we can make use of the
pop up form using our elementor page builder to embed them in
our press website. Now embedding and making use of a pop up form is really
helpful in cases where you are collecting E mail addresses of your visitors in exchange of a subscription to your free newsletter or
offering some a freebie. It could be an ebook,
a downloadable file, whatever you are trying to
share them with your audience. Ideally, you would like to add that pop up form
to your blog post. But if you go to the
post section right here, you'll find that we don't get an option to edit
with elementor. We'll have to create
a plockpost using our element or plugin only then you'll be
able to edit them. All right, for now, I'll embed the pop up form
in our home page itself. But before we even do that, we'll have to go back to our
Tress dashboard right here. You will find an option
to go to the templates, and under Templates
you'll find an option of pop ups. Let's click over there. And here you can
add a new pop up. Let's give something
a name here. You can choose between different items that you would
like to create. Let's give it a something
like newsletter. I can say something
like newsletter and I can create a template. Now obviously you all know that whenever we talk about any of templates or pop ups or anything related to
element or theme builder, it is definitely going
to show some pre made templates made
by element or pro. You'll have to connect your account with
elementor in order to make use of these
pro templates. We'll build it from scratch. Let's just close it from now. Using any of the templates
is not a bad practice. I'm not saying that we
are not going to do this, we are not going to do
that simply because I want you all to learn
everything from scratch. Here, I can just click on the plus icon and I can
choose the Flexbox layout. Now right here in
the Flexbox layout, you'll find different
layout options here. Either I can choose
these options where I have four containers, or I could manually add them in such a way
that they stack in a way that they appear in
a four column section. Let's use this.
Since we have it, we'll delete this container for now. What are we going to do? We'll just increase the width of this particular container
such that it fits the size. The width of this fits
within this part. All right, for that,
what are we going to do? Let's just select
this entire part. Let's make sure it is
set to horizontal, particularly this flex box. We want to increase the
width to about this much, which is 98% We could even do this 200,
it doesn't matter. But you can see that the sizing from here and
your about change. If we change this 200% let's
just keep it 100% For now, I will add an image. Obviously, we would like to showcase what this
newsletter is all about. We can maybe share the cover of the newsletter, but for now, I would just like to give some image which I have
already in my media library. I'm going to select this image. After selecting this, I can
add a title right here. What exactly we want our
users to take action and why should they actually
subscribe to our newsletter? We can say something like
subscribe to our newsletter. Now, you can replace this with
download the free book or get access to our free webinar or anything like
that Right here. In the next container,
I can add a form. Let's search for form. Here we have the form
which is a pro element. If I can just close and
I'll show you under pro, you'll find different
options as well. Here you'll find a pro here, we'll just drag and
drop it right here. You will find different fields, name, e mail message. Now we don't want
all of the fields, we're just looking to
get the e mail address or maybe even name instances. But for now we just want to collect the e mail
address of our visitors. We'll go to the form right here. You can see the editing
pane of element or you'll find that
we are currently editing the form fields. We can change the name
of the form if you want or you could even or delete or may duplicate
the values of the fields. Let's close out
name and message. And we just want e mail. Now you can see inside
the input field, you have the
placeholder as e mail. Above that, you also
have a label as e mail. Now, it doesn't make sense to add the same thing
over and over again. We can just toggle
off the label so that only placeholder will clearly showcase what exactly the user is supposed to
enter. Right here. Fine. We can even
change the color of the button by going to
the section buttons. You can change the name of the button instead of making
use of the text Submit. We can say Subscribe. All right, Subscribe.
In this part, in this button itself,
we go to style buttons, we can change the color. This button, the Submit
button right here. We can change the
background color to green. The global color
which we have saved. Fine, this is the
layout of our form. Now where exactly we want our
e mail address to be sent, we would require some kind of an e mail marketing
integration software. There are a bunch of
different options like your mail chimp, You'll have convert kit, which I personally
use and I'll also show you all how we can
embed them in our website. Right here under
this layout content, you'll collect submissions. Here the submissions will be saved to element
or submissions. There is a portion inside your Wortress dashboard
under element, or you'll find submissions
from where you can see in the Wortress dashboard
that who has submitted. But if you're actually integrating it with your e
mail marketing software, you can just go over
here, you'll find that. What kind of actions
do you want? What kind of a collect
submissions and e mail? And once you click
on this plus icon, you'll find a bunch of
different options to integrate with your campaign. Let's say you have campaign in mailchimp or in convert kit, or you're using
Mail Alight Slack, Discord or anything like that. So let's just keep
it as convertkit. And once I add this convert kit, you'll find an
option right here. Now the procedure for mail chimp might be a little different. But the only reason
why I'm going with convert kit is because anyone can get started
with convert kit. It is completely
free of cost as of now for at least
1,000 subscriptions. That means until
and unless you hit 1,000 e mail list
in your account, you won't be charged
a single penny. But in case of mail chimp, I think you are required to start off with $20
a subscription. Right here under convert kit, you'll find an option
to enter your APIk'll. Choose custom
instead of default. And below this we will
have to enter our APIK. How are we going
to fetch our APIK? First, we'll need
to go to Convert kit page once you log
into our convert kit, or if you have created
a new account, you can just go to
your profile at the top right section,
click on Settings. Once you click on Settings, you will find an advanced
option right here and here. Once you scroll down,
you'll find an APIK. Just copy this. We'll
go back to our website. We'll paste this right
here and it will give you a bunch of different
options to choose from what exactly it's
trying to tell us. Let's just give it a time to load it and integrate
it with a convert kit. Here you'll find a bunch of different lead magnets and landing pages that
I've created so far. These are my landing pages. Now, convert kit
has two options to create and grow your
subscriber list. First, either to create a
new form or a landing page. Landing pages are one where you create your e mail address and
it's a standalone web page hosted by Convert Kit
itself and it's using your own domain or their
convert kits domain. Depending on your use case, you can either create
a landing page or a form if you want
to create a form, it basically it's
embedded portion. The only difference, the major difference between landing page and form is that form is
a part of a web page, whereas landing page is a
standalone web page itself. The functionality of
both things are same. They're trying to collect e
mail address in exchange of a subscription to a
newsletter or an event, or offering them a lead magnet. But we can just
make use of form. As of now, I'll create
a form and I can just keep this as modal because we want it to be a pop up thing. I can choose a simple
like this, Charlotte. Now I know this
course is not all about convert kit,
but just to create, just for the purpose of
building an e mail list and showing you all how
we can integrate our Convertkit with element, or I'm creating this
dummy form. All right, here I can click Publish. Now once I click on Publish, I'll see multiple
different options. Javascript, HTML, Share,
press Bounce, and so on. But for now I would not go
ahead with any of them. Okay, I'll just save on this, Maybe I can change this
to something like, let's just say elementor pro. All right, elementor pro,
that's it. I'll save this. I'll click on Publish. And right now I'll
just keep it under HTML tab once I go back here, and if I select, I should
normally find it here, right here, which is
my elementor pro form. But for now, let me just select
the web dev lead magnet. Once I select this, what essentially will happen
is that whatever actions supposed to be taken
by that landing page, that means to send some kind of lead magnet or
involve them in a loose letter subscription
that will take place from this
particular pop up form. Here I collect e mail address
from this e mail field, and the landing page itself
requires first name also. But our pop up form does
not have a name field. You can skip this for now. And you can even add tags. Tags can help you to categorize all the e mail
list where exactly the traffic is coming
from later on. If you would like to
just send out the mail, the e mail broadcast
to a bunch of people in your entire list, you can target them by
adding into your tag list. I'm not going to go in
detail in depth about convert kit and how the entire e mail marketing software works, but I hope you get the
point about working around these different e
mail campaign softwares. Okay, right here, I've built this and I'm
going to publish. Now once I click on Publish, you'll find different
conditions and triggers. It basically means that where exactly do you want to
display your template? The pop up form that we created? On which page do you want to showcase this? We can add that. We just want to display
this on a singular page. Which page particularly? We want to showcase
this on our front page, which is the main web page. All right, I can go
to triggers now. Trigger basically means that
at what particular time, what exact event
when the user takes, we want to show up.
This pop up form. There is a page load, once I toggle around, you'll find that after how
many seconds the page loads, you want to show up.
This pop up form. If you want scroll, that means after a page
has been covered up, let's just say that
the user has read about 50% of the entire
web page content, then they should be given up. This pop up form.
You can do that. You can scroll on
particular element. Let's just say that
you have added some a class to your section. Then after that class
section has been swiped up, the pop up form
will be displayed. A click also trigger, which means that
whenever someone clicks on anywhere
on the web page, they will be prompted
with the pop up form. You have an after inactivity that once the user is reading, let's just say that you have
a very long block post. The content itself
is going to take about a minute or two
for the user to read. After about 15 to 20 seconds. Once the user is just
reading up without even scrolling or doing any activity, they will be showing
up. This pop up form. All right. You have
on page exact intent, that means whenever someone
closes your web page, they will be shown
up. This pop up form. All right, now I can
just keep this as on page load after
about 10 seconds. And I have an advanced
rules as well. So here you have show
after page views. Let's just say that you would like to showcase this
particular pop up form. After about ten or 15 users have actually viewed
your web page only, then it should show up first, you're getting all the ten
to 15 organic traffic. Now, once you have
gotten some traffic, you would like to show
up this pop up form after X sessions. That means the page views and page sessions
differ in terms of, let's just say that I'm a user, I'm viewing this web page. The page view count. Okay? I'm going to re, I'm
going to revisit this website. So that's going to
count as page views, but the session
is basically that how many times I'm
viewing your web page. All right, then there
is show up to x times. That means only show up this popper form once
for every unique user. You can even trigger around that rule when arriving
from specific URL. Let's say you have each
and every webpage, or each and every
block post has a URL. Now you want to showcase
this popper form to only those traffic which are redirected from your
social media accounts. Let's just say that you have pasted the link of
your web page, URL, on your Facebook or your
Instagram bio page for a limited portion of
time you're running like an event that please
sign up to my newsletter. Then you'll get access to some exclusive discount for
the upcoming product launch. That link is exclusively shared on Facebook and
Instagram stories. Whenever someone clicks through those stories through
those bio links, they will be showing
up this pop up form. Otherwise the organic traffic or coming on your website from Google search or
by just typing on your URL into the browser, they won't be shown
your pop up form. Then there is some show when
arriving from from where. Exactly. Let's just
say you want to categorize that from where. Internal links, external links. You want to even mark
this pop up page. Pop up page to be shown to
the users who are coming from Chrome Search Engine or
Google Search Engine instead of Bing or
other platforms. Hide for locked in users. Let's just say you're running
a discount for new users. The ones who have already
locked in won't be showing up. This pop up, you can even
toggle between devices. Let's just say this is an exclusive discount running
for your mobile devices. Only you can even do that, Particular browsers like Chrome, you have edge, you have
brave and other browsers, you can even schedule
date and time. Let's say you're running a
limited time webinar light, which will be conducted
during the weekends, throughout the entire weekdays
from Monday to Friday. You would like to
promote your web page with this pop up form so that people can sign up to your newsletter or your e mail, your webinar right here. You can just toggle
and choose the date. And only then that particular
pop up will be shown. But for now I'll just save and close once I view this,
let's see what happens. Okay, so what I'm going to do is I'll just go to home page, let's count to 101, 234-567-8910, Okay. Can see right here we
have this pop up form. All right, I hope you
get the point now, you also have one more option. This is the form
that you created inside your press website. What if you actually
have created a form in convert Et itself, And now you would
like to repurpose that same exact design layout in your Weress website. How
can you go about it? Let's just go to any
of the other page. For that, I'll have
to go to Dashboard. I'll create a new page. Okay? I'm going to create
a new page and I'm going to call this something
like, let's just say, let's just say that we are going to erit this with
element or later on, let's keep this as
convert pop up, form edit with elementor. We're going to go right here. The shallot form that
we created by using the pre built template
here under X tamal. We're going to copy the
entire X tamal code fine here inside our. This thing will create a flex
box with this direction, flex box with particle
direction inside add element. We'll search for HTML if you're confused whether this HTML is part of the pro or free version. Also you'll find HTML
in free version. Also, we can just drag
and place it right here inside this HTML code.
You just need to paste it. Once you paste it,
you need to publish. Once you publish and
you view your page, let's see if we can
see the pop up page. We cannot see this pop up page. I'm not quite sure why
it did not happen. Ideally should. Let's
go to settings. Let's see other settings
that we have on our form. Okay? So this should be
visible for all the devices. Okay, Timing is 5 seconds, okay? The only reason why
we were not able to see because the timing
was set to 5 seconds, let's just drop it down
to maybe even three. Okay, let's save this again.
I'll click on Publish. I'll copy the Tamil code. Now you can see the pop up is visible because it took
about 5 seconds to show up. The pop up, fine, I hope you
get the point about creating pop up and collecting E mail addresses from your visitors.
17. Side Navigation Bar Popup Menu - You don't wanna miss out!: Guys, now that we have
learned about pop ups, you're going to use
the same concept to build a side navigation bar. Right here in our home page, we have this ellipsis
icon at the header. Once the user clicks on it, we warned that the user
should be prompted with a side navigation bar coming
from the right direction and in an animation format with some image gallery
and home page menu. All right, for that we'll have to go back to
press Dashboard. Once we go over there in
the template section, we have pop ups. Let's go there. We'll add a new
template and we'll give the name as side nav bar. All right, let's
create a template. Once we do this will obviously prompt us with some templates which we are not going to use. We'll build it from scratch. Now the white layer that you see right here in the
middle of our web page, this is where your
pop up will appear. But this is not where we want. We want our navigation bar to come from the
right direction, from the right hand side
of the screen right here. When this entire
thing is selected, we'll just click
on this gear icon which is pop up settings. And we'll change the
position of this, that it should appear in
the horizontal direction. With respect to the
vertical direction, it should appear at
the topmost part. All right, And the
width needs to be dropped down to
something like, let's just say 420. I think 425 would
be good enough. I think 425 is more
than enough Now, once we have done this also
will make the height to fit the entire screen so that it occupies the entire height. And we can adjust our
content and elements inside this particular sit
site navigation bar such that it appears
in the center. And there is some enough
space between the elements. Fine. Now here we
have the animation. Also when entrance animation
should be that, you know, slide in right, slide in from right and exit animation
should be slide out right. Fine. Since we want to make
this animation bit faster, we'll move the slider towards
the left side and we'll make the animation
about 0.6 seconds. All right, let's
click on the ad. We'll make the flex box in
the downward direction. Only one container is
what we are required. And we'll add an element. Now inside this, the
first thing that we're going to add would be our logo. Let's search for site logo. That's what we're going
to add inside here. Fine. By the way, the
background for this, our entire this
site navigation bar should be black in
color in the style. First I click on this
gear icon which is pop up settings in
the style section, I'll go to the background
type, I'll select Classic. I'll change the
color to somewhat to a darker shade. All right. Yeah, I think this would
be good enough Now, once we have done this,
we have our site logo. We want to change
our site logo such that it appears
in the center and the width of it is something
around 45% would be good. Fine. Now after this we would like to show
our image gallery. Before that it would be good if we can add some a text editor. Let's add a text editor
right in this container. And here we have the text. Let's change the font style
to poppins, font family. Let's search for poppins and the color of the
text to be white. Fine alignment,
again to be center. Now below this, we're going
to add a social link. We're going to add
a social link. We want to list an
icon list that we have an Instagram logo and we have the URL of our
Instagram profile. Fine. We have the list again. We just want one list. Right now, this icon
should be Instagram. We'll select Instagram
on, we'll insert this. Once we have this,
the text would be a. I'm going to place the
URL of my Instagram page. This is the URL, or I should say
just the user name. And I can even add
the URL over here. If I want the icon to
be clickable, fine. I want this to be
in line, right? It appears within the same line and we can apply the
styling between them. Let's make it center aligned. We can change the color
of the icon to be white. We can also change the color
of the text to be white. Let's change the color
of the text to be white. And we can also increase the
typography and size of this. I think about 25 pixels
would be good enough. Let's change the font style
to poppins to make sure that there is
consistency followed across the entire website. Again, the icon size should
be increased to 25 pixels. Fine, this is good enough. What I don't need to add at because it's
obvious that we are talking about our user name. Fine, this is good enough. Now below this, we are going to add a gallery, image gallery. So let's search for gallery basically, gallery and grousl. Fine, let's add a gallery
right below this part. Fine, we have to select
a bunch of images. Let's add few images. This one, I'm holding
down my command key. Windows systems, you need to
hold on your control key. Fine. These two images I think. Let's also add these two. Fine, we have six images and we are going to insert
them into this gallery. Fine. Now we can order them by random or some lesyload
could be applied. Lazy load basically means that whenever you're trying
to load your website, few images will be loaded. Then the next set of images
will be loaded if you want your website performance
to get a higher score. Now the layout should
be in a grid format. You can change the
number of columns. Right now we have four columns. You can see the first
column has two images, second column has two images, column has only one image, and the fourth column
also has one image. Let's drop down the columns
to three so that it can adjust and fit the six images in two rows and three columns. Fine. Let's also change the
spacing between these images. I think about 18:18
would be good enough. Fine. We can also change
the styling of it such that the ratio can be changed from three S
to four to four S. Three, the image size would change 16 S to nine is also
what we can do. But for now let's just
keep it four S to three. That would be good, I think. Or initially it was
three S to 02:00 A.M. I, correct? Yeah.
Image resolution. We have medium thumbnail. I think for this particular
size of navigation bar, this is the perfect
sizing for our gallery. Fine. Now, below this,
we can add our menu. We can add our Tres
menu right here. Below this, we can
add our Tres menu. Again, we can centerline
the contents. We can change the color
of the text to white, Fine in the typography. I could change this to
Poppins Fun family, right? This is our navigation
right side or side nav bar Along with this, what other things could be add. There are a bunch of different
things that you can add. You can also add a few
more social links. Let's try to do it. Can box or can list just
below our press menu. Let me just delete other items. Or maybe I could add
few more items and give them something like
Facebook and Twitter. Or maybe even linked
in for that matter. Fine, I can do the same thing. So I can just copy the styling. I can paste it right here. Paste styling fine. For this, I can change
this to Facebook logo. Apply the Facebook
settings right here. We can add the name of my
Facebook page below this. I can change this to something
like, let's say Linton. All right, Linton again, change the text to this and we have finally completed
building our right bar. Now for our nav bar, we want to make sure
that the contents of this entire container are
occupying the entire height. Fine. The main height
should be 100 V H. That means it occupies
the container height, is the entire
viewport height fine. Along with that, the direction is vertical and we
want to center, align the content,
Align items to center, and make sure that there is
some gapping between them. So we can even add some gaping, increase the gap size. It appears nicely. I think about 35 would
be good enough, right? This is exactly what we
want when we publish this. Now it will prompt us with different
conditions, triggers, and rules that we would
like to set up for our right side knife bar pop up. But the intention behind using this navigation bar
is that whenever the user clicks on your
ellipsis in the header, this navigation
bar should pop up. That means no matter how
many post pages you create, you want this side
knife bar to show up. Right. For now, we'll
just save and close. We won't apply any conditions
or triggers, or rules. We'll go back to our press
website in the navigation bar. Let me just go to the home page. I'll click on Edit
with Elementor. Once I go there, I'll edit
my header that we created. Fine, let me just
give it a moment. Right here in the header,
I'll edit my header. Right here in the header,
I have the three icons. I can click on Link. In the dynamic tag option, I have an option to
choose a pop up. You can see in the
actions I have pop up. I can select the pop up again. I need to click on
the settings of the pop up and now
it will show up. Whether I want to choose all pop ups or only
a specific pop up, obviously we just want a
specific side knife bar. So we'll just search
for side if bar template and that's what
we're going to save. Let's publish this
and we will view our web page when I view this
and when I click on this, you can see a side
knife bar appears. If I click anywhere outside
the nav bar, it disappears. I hope you guys are enjoying
this course so far. If you guys have any
questions you can ask me in the In section and
I'll try my best to answer each and every
one of your questions.
18. Post Element to Design Blog / Product Posts: Let's look into another
element or pro element, which will be post element. But before I just
go right into it, I would just like to
highlight that I have added a few more block
posts right here. As you can see that
we made a look. Correct. Over here you can see other posts
are being populated. Now, the image for the block one is not being proportionate
compared to the others because the image ratio and the image dimensions
are different than what we have for
the other cards. Also, you can find that
the height of each and every card is a bit different simply because we
have different title. We can adjust the height. We can make the height fixed. That means it should not go beyond this
particular height. The title size could be dropped
down to maybe about 35, 40 pixels we can work around. One thing you might notice is that we had block two as well, but it's not being
populated over here. Now why is that? Let's just
edit this with elementor. I'll just click right
here, by the way, in my menu also, let me just show
you what I mean. I can just preview the
changes right here. Whenever I ho around block, you'll find block one, block two in all the other
blocks that I added. Now this did not get
populated automatically, I had to go back to my tres
dashboard, appearance menus. I went to posts, I added all the things which were supposed to be added in my menu. And then I dragged
and dropped it, it below the blog page. It became sub item
of my blog page. And I saved the menu.
Correct. We can also see the pop up that
we created earlier. Let's go to our element
or settings. Right here. We'll select your
template for loop grid. Let's click on, first of all, let me just save back. All right, we have
this loop grid, Let me just select on
any one of those cards, we can just select any
one of those cards. Okay, right here in this space, the blank space between
these two cards. And you can see we have
selected the loop grid. All right, now you'll find
that there are three columns, That's why we can see
six blocks appearing. But you can find
that only six items per page can be populated, so you can increase them
or maybe even decrease it. If I bring this down to only
three cards should be shown in this particular home page, then you can add
pagination as well. Pagination basically means
that you can add numbers. At the bottom right here, you have one to three
options instead of numbers. You can even change this
to previous or next. Like this, you could even
add numbers plus previous, next, previous, 123, Next, like this, and there
is a page limit. Also, you can increase the
page limit if you want. You can change the text of the previous label
and the next label. Also, something like
back and forward, you can load on click, which basically means that
you can get a button, you can customize the button, and whenever someone
clicks on the button, it will load the spinner and it will populate
the other blog cards. Or you could have
an infraite scroll. The infraite scroll would be best case scenario of using infinite scroll would be when you have a separate
product page. That product page displays all the products related
to electronics item. And let's just assume
that you have 15, 20 electronic items to be
displayed on that page. Over there you can make use of your inference crewel
but not on home page. That's not a good
practice right now. Let's just keep this As button so we can make use of load more. You can even change
the icon if you want. Right now we are not going to make use of any of the item. You can change the spacing,
you can align this, you can style the button, and there are a bunch of different things that you
can also play around with. Like here you have equal height. So once I toggle this, you'll find that
all the height for the cards are set
to equal correct. Then you also have
query Basically means that what source you
want this to be, whether you want to display
all the post pages, lining pages, whatever you would like to select,
you can do that. How exactly do you want to
arrange alphabetically? Do you want it to
order by title, the comment count, the blog
which was published latest? You can set it, do a bunch
of different things. Okay, so I'm just
going to publish this. And the only reason why
I was touching upon the loop grid topic again
because the post section which, which we're going to cover in this lecture is
similar to Loop grid. Loop Grid is an
additional element. Which element? Or
added recently, but previously we
had post element. When I click on Add Element, you'll find in the pro
section you'll have Post. What happens if I add Post?
Let me just click on this. I'll click on Flex Box and I'll choose this
horizontal direction. Now if I drag and drop the post element right
inside this container. Let's see what happens.
Once I do this. You'll find that all the posts
are being autopopulated. Now, the design layout is a bit different than what
we set in loop grid. Because loop grid we made
from scratch, right? It was completely custom
designed for the loop grid. But for this elements
of Post part, you can see right here it is, using some default settings,
you can change round. It's not that you
have to stick with the default design settings
like here for the title. You can see you can
change the color of the title as well By
going to the style tape, you'll find content in content, you can change the title
color instead of blue, you can make this to
your green white. You can change the
typography to, let's just say poppins,
the same settings. The font family will be applied to each and every
card, all right? You can even change the
text stroke if you want. You can add some meta data. Now, what does
metadata mean here? The date, the comments, all these are metadata. All right, so then
you have excerpt, which basically means that you have to set it manually
while you're creating post. It basically shares what
exactly your post is all about. So it's like a brief
description about your post, that's excerpt content, and
then you have read more. This read more is like a link, not more of a button here. You can change the
color, you can change the typography again, I can set this to poppins. Okay, let's try to
make poppins for each and every text
element so that you consistency is maintained throughout the entire website. Here also, I'll make
this poppins fine. So here we have changed
up the content. Coming to the image part. You can add border
radius if you want. You can give some
spacing if you want, you can add some CSS filters. I have discussed this very
early on in the course that CSS filters allows you to manually adjust the
blur brightness, contrast, and other
effects to edit your image instead of using another
image erting software. All right, coming
to the box part, that means each and every
card you can add border. If I try to add border width, you'll find that it's
forming like a border. I can make this bit darker
so it will be a bit fatter. I can even add some border
radius, something like this. I can add some padding. Obviously, the
content is sticking, so we can add some
border radius and padding for the box here. I can add maybe about,
let's just say ten. This is how you'll find from
each and every direction. Fine. But if you don't
want padding for the entire part and
you just would like to give padding to the content,
you can even do that. Let's see how it works. If I add ten, then you'll find that the image
stays as it is. But the content,
which is your title, your excerpt, your meta data, and your read more, has some padding around
the four directions. You also have different
effects that will happen upon Hoover
and on normal mode. You also have box shadow. If I click on box Shadow, you'll find that
there is some shadow behind the cards that
would look good. Then you can also change the
background color of this. If I change this
background color, you'll find that the content
background color changes. I just clear this
because I don't want, you can even give some
border color to this. I can set the
global green color. This would look
good in my opinion, but it's not that great. Let's just bring this
back to default. I can just click
on the color and I'll click on the refresh icon. Fine, this is how it looks. Now coming back to
the layout part here, you'll find gaps
between the columns. Currently it's set to 30 pixels. If I increase this,
you'll find that the more I increase the
gap between my cards, more my content shrinks down. Let's just keep this as 30. Now there is some
row gap as well. So here we have three columns
and two rows, correct? So here you can even increase
the row gap if you want. So let's just keep
this as 50 pixels. You can even align the content
which you have right here. So you can either center line, left a line, or
even right a line. But I think center
line would look good. Okay, coming to the
content part here, you have different skin layouts. Classic card format. If I change this to card format, you can see this looks
really, really good. Here you have
different categories. Now, categories
is something that I've set while I
was creating Post. Let me just take you back
to the Tress dashboard, right here inside
the Post section. I'll go to all posts, and right here you'll
find categories. So here I've made few
blocks which are part of the coursest categories and two blocks which are part of
this category. All right? And I've given few hashtags so that when people are searching
around different blocks, they can search up
the content and they will be able to find that
particular block piece. Fine. In order to
categorize them, you simply need to click
on any of the block post, click on Ert, right here
in the editing pane. You can give a tag and you can even categorize them by
adding a new category. I hope you get the point
about categories and tags. You can add multiple tags or
even multiple categories. But what essentially
categories and tags allows you to
do is that later on, let's just say
that you have made some kind of block cards that you can see right
here in the web page. And at the top you'll
find categories. So basically this block
belongs to courses category, but this courses category has multiple different courses like ranging from operating
system to web development, to UI UX, to data sections and algorithms
and stuff like that. So all these individual
courses will have some kind of relating
hashtag related to the content and title
that it entails to so that it's
easier in terms of search engine to find your content piece so that visitors can land
on your web page. I hope you get the point. Now, we also have different
thing called as full content. That means entire block
posts will be visible, which we do not obviously want. Let's just keep this as cards
because card looks unique. It's different than
Classic because Classic looks very similar to what we have created in the Loop Grid. All right, here you can
even set number of columns. Now whatever columns
you're going to set, it will be applied
to the desktop mode only if you would like to keep only one column for
mobile tablet device. You can even change
by just clicking on this tablet mode and you
can set this to one. If I scroll down,
you'll find that only one column is presented. If I change this two,
let's just say three, then this is not looking
really that great. Let's see if it works in two. In desktop mode, it looks
good if we have two columns. Let's see what happens
if we have mobile mode. Obviously, we would like to have only one card
because there is not much width to fit
all the content. Then you also have option two display all the
posts per page. This is what we have
discussed earlier. You can show the image if you want. You can even toggle this. Let's see what happens
if you select machinery. If I click on this, you
can see what happens. What essentially happen is the entire image
border also appears. If I toggle this, you'll find that the image
first of all, let me just bring this
back to desktop mode. I'll click on machinery again, and let's see what happens. You'll find the
entire image appears and the height is not
being adjusted equally. That's what machinery
actually means. You can set the image size, you would like to set
this to thumbnail size, you can do it you would
like to set as full, then entire full
image would be set. But let's just
keep it as medium, which was there initially. I think it was medium large. If I'm not wrong, I think medium or medium large was something which was applied previously. So let's just keep medium. There is also image ratio. By moving the slider, you'll find that image is
being zoomed in or zoomed out depending on where you are placing your
cursor or slider. Fine for me, I think about
0.56 would look good. Fine, this is 0.56 here. You can even toggle
between title if you'd like to
display title, you can. But obviously it's a good
practice to include title. If you are trying to showcase what your block
post is all about, then you can change the title. You can change the estimable
tag for your title. Now ideally, it's a good
practice to make use of two tag for your
block post title. So we'll just keep it as two. If you'd like to include
excerpt, you can. You also have excerpt length. And obviously this
is representing the number of words and not
the number of characters. Instead of 100 words,
we could just keep this as something like
let's just say 25 words. Only the first 25 words
would be displayed. Fine. Then you also have
applied to custom excerpt. So if you have made up your entire custom excerpt in
while creating block post, then that will be the same. Settings will be applied
over there as well. Fine, and here you
have meta data. Now inside the meta data, you'll find that initially date and comments is
being represented. Right? If you'd like
to add more data like who published this
particular article, at what time and when
exactly was this modified? Was this even updated or not? You can even add those things. You could even add
separator between these meta data by
choosing the icon, by placing dot or maybe
even the separate. You can add this, then you
have read more option. You can toggle them, you
have read more text, or you could change
this to something else. You also have buttons. If you make this, then
see what happens. It automatically
align the buttons if you have then open
in a new window. So whenever someone
clicks on the link, do you want the block post
to open in a new tab? Obviously, we want
that to happen. Otherwise, what will happen? That Google or any
other search engine, we'll recognize that whenever someone visitors lands
on your home page, they are quickly jumping
onto a new page. So that will increase your
bounce rate and it will drop down your indexing in
terms of search rankings. So here you have
categories as well. In this badge here, you can find categories
instead of categories, do you want it to be hashtags? So here you can even make use of hashtags or you could
make use of categories. Here you have an avatar option. If you have you make use
of any of your Aviatar. What I mean right here, you'll find that this is my
profile, this is Aviatar. You can edit the profile. And you can just choose any of your avatar if you would
like to display right here. And you can just display by selecting this Coming
to the query part, you have different options to
just arrange them just like we saw earlier in Luke grid. You can add pagination
if you want. Essentially, post element is very similar to what we
have seen in Luke grid. It is not much different but the only
difference is here is that you don't need to actually create
anything from scratch. There are many things which are pre built and you
can play around with those settings to
get started with your post card section to
include in your home page.
19. Portfolio Element to Showcase your Products / Blogs: All right, let's see
how we can make use of the portfolio element which is part of the element
or pro plug in. Right here you can see
portfolio. What does it mean? I have this website right here. You can see that this is
using the portfolio element. If I click on fashion, you'll find that only
this one appears. If I click on jewelry, this kind of image appears. There is some border radius. When we hover around, you'll
find that the text with some green background and these two icons appear
with some hover effect. Here, we do have filters, Let's try to build
something like that. I'll create a new section. We'll keep the flex box
direction to be vertical. Let's add the portfolio element. As soon as I add
portfolio element, what it is doing it
is just bringing up the images of my posts
right here in the query. You'll find that it
is ordering by date. Whichever was published
latest was being displayed right here,
Order by descending. In the layout part, you
would find what kind of image resolution do
you want to make use of? How many posts per page
do you want to see? Let's just keep this as three. We want three columns,
that would be good. Image ratio can
also be adjusted. If I hober, you can
find that the title of the block post appears
now in the query part, you'll find the source. Do you want to
display all the post? Do you want to display
all the pages? Do you want to display
landing pages, manual selection, current query or anything related to it? What happens when
you add current query or anything like that? You'll have to add the ID. We'll touch upon the ID
and classes later on. But for now let's just
keep this as post. All the post that we have, all the featured images
for that post will show up right here
we can and maybe even exclude if we
would like to just show few of the post instead of bringing out all
the post content. All right, here you can
buy or exclude them. Even avoid duplicates
if we want. Right here, you can
go to the filter bar, and if you want to
display the filters, you can even display them here. When you click on Show, you'll be given two options, either to choose from
categories or tags. Let's see if we have categories,
you'll find courses. We should obviously see one more option
which is net mafia. But let's just keep this as
you'll find different tags. Now, the option show up
only because we have kept that only three posts
per page should be shown. Same thing goes, we
have categories. Ideally, we know that we have created two
categories, right? If I go to Layout and I display
all the posts per page, let's just say I just create as many posts
as I have currently. I've made this to 15, but we
just have seven posts here. You'll find two categories. Just keep this as
maximum number, how many pages you have. Just keep this as
like that here. You can change the title, whatever you have, whether
you want to display or not. You can even set the
item ratio here. You can adjust the heighten
width of your image by just placing the cursor
and moving the slider. Or you could just
click on the up and down arrow keys
on your keyboard. You can choose H two
tag if you want. If you choose H two tag, then you'll find that the
title appears better fatter. And yeah, let's go to style. We can add some
column gap between them that would look good. Also some row gap. All right, 25 or maybe even
35 would look good for both the scenarios and
your row and column. Let's add some border radius. If I just keep this
as border radius, you'll find that
after a point it turns with rounded
edges or the corners, you have an item overlay. What happens if you
choose the item overlay? Let's select green, which
is our global color. Here, you can choose
the green color. And you'll find that the text appears and there
is some background. But I would like to make
some changes around this. We could make this color
as a bit transparent. Let's see what happens now, Let's make it a
little bit opaque. I think this would
work just perfect, I think about this much. Yeah, this looks fantastic. Let's just keep this
as it is, All right? You can also choose between different colors of your
text and typography. Let's set the
typography to Poppins. I'm going to select Poppins. If I hope you'll find that Poppins Fun Family has been applied to the text
Fclicon filter bar. You'll find that
we can even change the color of the filter bar. You can even add active color, whatever is being selected
that will be shown. You could even change
the typography of this. Let's choose poppins. We have chosen poppins, we can add spacing between them. You can add spacing
between all these things. You can even go to color. Let's see what happens
if we choose color. You'll find that the
font color changes. If we choose active, then currently you'll see
all are selected fine here. The difference between the
space between and spacing is that if I move my
slider for space between, you'll find that the spacing
between my filter bar. Changes. If I change
the spacing between this filter bar and the
items that I have for my portfolio will
increase or decrease. Let's just keep this as 35. That consistency is maintained
throughout this page. Here you have the section. Instead of choosing box, you can even make
this as full width so that it appears end to end. If you would like to give this some padding, you
can even do that. Let's try to add some
padding from left and right. If I add some padding from left, you'll find that the
content appears, but there is some space. Let's also add 30
from right here, you'll find some spacing. Okay, this is what
we have done so far. Now, you could even add some background color to this entire section by just
clicking on this section. Going to the style type, we could go to
background overlay. Now let's focus on
background overlay, which we have not
covered so far here. If I choose background type as classic for background overlay, I can choose one image. Let's just assume that I'm choosing this particular
image. All right. Now I have this image
in my background. Now, initially you can see that the color is
not being selected. But still the image appears, the image appears very
transparent kind of a thing. Now, how did that happen? Just by going to
the CSS filters, find that blur is set to zero. Brightness is all these things. But if you drop down
the saturations, you'll find that
the entire image which is working in the
background is black and white. A thing, something similar
which is achieved right here. You can see that the image in the background has some
black, white shade. You can do that by
clicking on CSS filters, dropping down the
saturation to zero. All right? And this
will only happen if you're selected background
overlay. All right? It won't happen if
you have selected your background,
simple background. Also you'll find that it
is being transparent. If you choose this
to be 100% opaque, then this is what you'll find. Okay, let's just drop this down. 2.6 0.6 would look good. Okay, you have blend mode. Different types of blend mode. Let's not touch into that here. Inside your position, you would find different
positions which we have covered. Attachment is something which
we have not touched upon. Bilifolt would be set
to scroll or default. Let's see what happens
if we choose fixed. If I choose, if I scroll, you can see that
image also changes. The image direction with
respect to the Y axis changes. Essentially we are scrolling the image also in
the background. That's what happens right here for our, for our portfolio. I'll go to filter bar. I'll make the typography
to be a bit fatter. Let's make this bold so that
it's visible right here. We could even
change the color if you want, but I won't touch it. Item overlay, you
can find that here we have different
things which we have covered and
different items. Also, I hope you guys get the
point about making use of the portfolio element and
how we can make use of the background overlay by
adding some CSS filters, changing the opacity,
and also changing the attachment of the
background overlay.
20. Price List Element - Display your Service Charges: Let me show you another
element which is price list. I'm going to add a new
section right here. I might select the flex box
with a vertical direction. Later on we can add
more containers. I'll add element right here
inside the price list. Once I drop this, you'll find that
we have a title, we have description, then you have a few dots and then
you have the price. When can this exact element
could come in handy? Let's say you're building a service page or
maybe even like website for a restaurant or cafe where you're just displaying the price list for each
and every food item. So you can just click
on the background here. I have the background of the entire container, the flex box. I'll go to the style. And what I can do for the background, I can select one image, so I'll just click
on Classic Image. I've uploaded one coffee image. What exactly we are
trying to build is a section for the price of all the different coffees that this cafe serves. Here
you have the image. But we would also like to give some kind of a
background overlay. All right, here in the
background overlay, we can select a gradient kind of effect even though you have
an image in the background. You can even add
gradient color effect with supplement to your image. Here you have a color, the primary color and
the secondary color. Let's keep the
primary color to be somewhat like a dark red shade. So let's just keep
it somewhat like a dark brownish shade. All right? And the second color will keep this as black, fine. And we'll change the location of the first color to about 75. Okay, From top to bottom, you'll find that the color is
appearing bit darker, fine. You'll also change the
opacity of the background. If I move my cursor or
my slider towards right, you'll find that the image
becomes more and more blur. Or there is more
dark of gradient, kind of a color shade going
around over the image. The text becomes visible fine. Now I can click on this
particular price list. I can click on Style. I can
go to Color of my text, and I can change this to White. Now you'll find that we have
title, the price right here. I can change this to white, I have description, which even I can change this to white. Now you'll find different
kind of separators between the title and the price list. For each and every items that
we have there is dotted. We can change this to, we
can change this to double, so there is double
lines going around. And you can even
make this non fine, but we would like to
keep this as dotted. You can even keep this as solid, but solid would not
look that great. You also have weight
for those dots. You can move the slider to
see what works for you. You can even add spacing, so you can find that the more you move your
slider towards, right there spacing it lefts from the title and
from the price. All right, here, let's
just keep the spacing 20. You can even change the color of your dots that you have the separator, then
you have the image. Now you can add
an image to this. For that, what are
we going to do? We'll go to content right
here in the content. You can expand on each
and every item list. You can set the price. You can change the
name of the title. Let's give this as espresso. We'll just keep the description. Whatever it is, we can change the image to this
particular icon. All right, then I can bring the same image for the
other items as well. I can make like Fracino. All right, then we
have hot chocolate. Let's just keep this
as hot chocolate. All right, let's expand on the
spacing for our separator. I think about 15 pixels
would look good. Fine. Here you have image now
for each and every image. Okay, first of all,
we'll have to add image for the hot
chocolate as well. Let's give this image. All right, and this is how
our menu would look fine. You can change the tag if you'd like to keep
this as H three. You'll find that the
title appears to be fat and it
appears in big size. You can change the color of
this H two tag if you would like by just selecting the
tag that you would like. For the span tag, it
will be set to white. If you want an H two or
H three or other tags, you'll have to change the
settings of that right here. You also have description
which is set to tag. So let's just keep it as it is. We'll go to style, we
have covered this part. But going to the image, you
can change the image size. Currently it's set to thumbnail.
You can change around. You can even add some border
radius if you would like, the spacing around the
image and the title and description that you can work around the
different items as well. How do you want to align
these different items? Do you want to align
them vertically? Do you want to align
the content that you have with respect to
the image in center, to the top or to the end? I think center would
work just fine. Let's just keep it like this. We can add a gap. Let's just keep this as
2020 would look good. Again, here in advanced, you can add a margin
padding and other stuff. We can make a duplicate
of this if we want. If I make a duplicate of this,
you can see what happens. It appears just below this, simply because we have set
the entire container section, the entire Flexbox
direction to vertical. If I change the layout
two horizontal, you'll find this is how it
looks at the top of this, we can even add a divider. Let me bring a divider right
here at the top most part. Or you know what, I could
even add one container. Let's search for contain. All right, I can add one
container at the top. Now, this container direction. First of all, let me just
edit the container settings. We'll change this to vertical. All right, in this
container we will put our price list and
this price list, fine. Now we would like to add one
more container at the top. Fine, so let's add a
container at the top here. Inside this container,
we will add our divider. This divider, we'll
have our title, we can add, Let's just
keep this a center line. Well, something like a menu. All right, here you
can change between different tags that you want. I'll just keep this as pan tag. I'll make this as solid. Width is fine. We'll go to color of the divider
and set this to white. So for our text as well, we can change, I can
go to typography, I can change this to poppins. I can even increase
the size of my text. For menu right here, this would look 50 pixels
would look just great, fine. Now for the other
containers that we have, where we have these
two price list, we can erit the container
settings to horizontal, and this is our menu
would look like, again, the price list. We can go to typography and change the typography
to poppins. Here I can select
poppins for title, poppins for the price, and poppins for
description as well. I can save the same settings
for the other as well by just copying and
pasting the style. You can see this is
how our menu would appear if we use the
price list element.
21. Countdown Element - Run a Limited Time Sale / Event: All right, let's see.
Another element, by the way, in this mine itself, we had the coffee image, but I just removed
the background by going to remove G website. And over there I just
uploaded my image. And I use that image for both
the price list elements. So I'm going to add a new
section right below this spart. Let's keep the flex box,
fifth vertical direction. Now I am going to make use of our countdown countdown element. Now when can this come in handy? Obviously, when we
are trying to run a limited time
promotion sales page. Or you're trying to
host a webinar which will be hosted just in
about a week or so. Or you're running a
sale actually there you can use this
countdown element first. Let's give this
container some kind of a background image right
here in background overlay. I'll select Classic
Select image as this one. As soon as we click on this, we'll find that opacity is set 2.5 will increase
this 2.9 or so. This image for this
entire container actually we'll take up the width as 100 H. Let's make
this as 100 H find, you would also find that the
image is being repeated. Let's go to background. We'll
make this as no repeat. If we make this as no repeat, you'll find that the
image ends right here. Instead, we'll make
the display size as contained it appears, and it enlarges itself with respect to the heightened
width of our container. Fine, now inside this, we'll place another image. Let's try to add one image which would be this big
sale right below this. We would also like to add
our countdown element. Let's drag and drop our
countdown element right here. I will place it,
but first let me see that where exactly for this image placed right
here in the structure, in this container,
we have the image. Ideally, the container
should allow to add countdown as well. Yeah, now we can
add our countdown. Here, you can find that the countdown appears
something like this. Now in the content part, you'll find the Due Date
or Evergreen timer, which basically means
that the timer will automatically refresh after
a certain period of time. If you want a due date, that means the sale should end after a particular
period of time. You can set the date by
just going to this tab and clicking When Sale
should actually end. Right now, I'm just
going to select Today. Today, the sale would
end in just a few hours. I can set the time. Also, right here we
have the calendar so that we can set the date,
the month and the year. Over here I can
set time instead, I can just make this
to about 10 minutes. Currently, time is 44 18:00 P.M. So we'll make this as
04:28 P.M. All right. Here you'll find, by the way, okay, the timing is
currently set to UTC. You'll find that
time is set to UTC. Currently, if you want that the timing show according
to your time zone, we can just go back to your dashboard, but press Dashboard. Let's click on right here. We'll go to Settings Part. Right here in Settings, you can find Time
Zone part right here. Just select whatever time zone
you are in. I'm in India. My time zone would be first, let me search for my
place right here in Asia. I would find my
place where? India. Calcutta is a city in India. I can just select this and
this will be my time zone. Let me just save
this by scrolling down and clicking
on the Safe button. I'll edit this with Elementor, and once I scroll down, you'll find that the timer is actually running
just for 8 minutes. Okay, So this is how
you can run the timer. Now, again, going
back to this part, there are different
view options. If you want this to
be in a block more, this is how it will appear. You can even neglect days if it's just a
matter of few hours, then you can just
toggle off days. Here you have custom
label if you want, you can even hide the label, but that wouldn't make sense. It is important
to include label. There is custom
label also if you would like to change
hours, minutes, or second. So, but we'll just
keep it as it is. And what other actions should it perform after
the time expires? That means what would happen
after seven to 8 minutes? So we have few options. Either we can redirect our
users to a different page, or we can hide this timer. Or we can show a message,
so we can show a message. Something like the sale
period has expired. All right, After the
time period ends, this message will be displayed, followed by exclamation mark. Going to the style part,
you'll find different options. Here you have the
container width. You can find that the container
width is about entire, 100% You can change the
background color of this, currently it's set to none. You can change this to
something like this. Each and every block
will have some kind of a block layout for
hours, minutes, seconds. Each and every one
will have its block. When when you have
the view as block, that text, which
is hours, minutes or seconds will
appear at bottom. If you in line, then
it will appear right below your time and
just beneath it. All right. And they will appear closely and compact
with each other. If you make this as block, this is how it will appear fine. You can even change
the styling of it. If you want to add some
kind of a border you can add currently it
is set to default, that means there is no border. You can change this to
solid double dotted groove. Let's see how groove looks like because you
haven't seen it before. It is very similar to solid, but there might be a few
differences here and there. Let's see what happens if I select this border
and I increase the border width to
about, let's say 20. This is how it looks like, It's like a frame effect
groove border type. If I change this to solid, my border width would
be something like this. But let me just bring it back to two because that
would be sufficient, in my opinion, we can increase the border radius to
make it circular, fine. In order to make this circular, we'll have to first
make this as in line. After making this in line, this is our content
would look like. All right, now you also have
some spacing between all three of the blocks or
merits and seconds. All right, here you
can add some padding. By increasing the padding,
what will happen? The spacing around the
content will increase. Obviously, you know
about this part. We can increase the padding. You can drop down the spacing if you
want, inside content. You can change the
color of the content. You can change the topography to poppins, let's say poppins. What happens in label? We can even change the
color of the label as well. We'll set this to
default, which is white. Again, change the
typography to pops. If you want to make this as
bold, you can even do that. You can add a text stroke. You can add a
message if you want. You can change the
typography of the message. Text. Color of the message
that will appear after the countdown ends will appear in center with white
color, pops font. And we want to have
some font weight which would be bold,
700 bold, right? Let's also increase the size
to something around 35, 30 would look good, I think. Yeah. Now, inside this
entire thing itself, what happens if we
go to advanced here? You'll again find all
the default options that we can see for all
the other elements. I hope you get the point about using different kinds of things. Let me just drop down the time to about just a minute or
so. Just a few seconds. And I can just publish this to see that what message
will be shown. If I scroll down here, you'll find that the
sale period has expired. All right, but now we have
some spacing right here. Now, why is that appearing?
Let me just go back. Right here, we have
the entire container. This container,
we'll go to style. We'll set the background. Okay, container. We'll have our
background overlay. We want this, no repeat. Let's make this a cover. Okay. Cover will occupy
the entire with fine. Once we publish, let's
refresh the page right here. If I scroll down here, you can find the entire
width is taken up fine. You can see the sale
period has expired. All right, so that was all about using the countdown element.
22. Blockquote Element - Include Quotes / Tweets in your Blog Page: All right, let's see
another element here. I'll create a flex box. I'll add a new element. This element is block code. Instead of searching
here we have block code. I can even type down
by searching element. And here we have the block code. Now, how can block code help us and what
exactly does it do? Here? As you can
see, it basically shares given by someone
and linked to the tweet. Let's just assume that you're
writing your block post. And you as an author, you made a tweet on
your Twitter platform. You can include that right here. There are different skins for each and every, what do you say? This block code. You
can change the content. You can change the author name. You can add or remove the
Tweet button if you want. If you include the tweet button, you have different
options to include either an icon or just text, or both icon and text. You can change the
color of Twitter, but I think I would
like to keep this as Twitter logo color here. You can change this to bubble. Bubble is basically
like chat box thing. Let me just publish
this and show you how it would look like
here in my page. Once I scroll down here, you would find this bubble Here you can see a
little bit arrow. That's what a bubble is. You can even change
this to link. That means whenever
someone clicks on it, they will be redirected
to your tweet. Let's just keep this
as classic here. You have the label
which you can use. You can add your
username something like, let's just say this is one username that
I'm going to keep. Whenever someone clicks on it, they will be redirected
to your page. Let me just see if the
changes are reflected. Wait a second. Just a second. I'm just going to
change this part. I'll scroll down where I can
just click on the tweet. If I click on it here, you would find this tweet from this Twitter platform
or Twitter user. All right, let's cross this. And here I have different
options to choose from where exactly I want to target this current
page, non custom. And you can set it
only one option you have in the content
which is block code. By going to the style section, you can change the text color. You can change the typography. You can change the gap between the author name and the
tweet that they have made. You can change the color
of the typography. You can mess around with
the button size, word, radius, color, add
some custom color, Or you could stick with the
official Twitter color. You can play around
with the border of the center thing here. You could add a border width. You could add some, a gap. You could even add some
vertical padding and stuff. Let me just bring
it back to default. Here you have
border as the skin. You can even change
this to quotation. Once I make it
quotation, you would, you would generally see
the double quotes icon, but it is not visible. So we'll have to go to style. We'll have to go to
coat right here. We can select as black. If I make this black
here, you'll find it. This icon appears. You can increase or
decrease the size of this. You can add a gap if you want. You can mess around the button which we
have seen earlier. We can have other option
as well like boxed code. We can have clean way where I think I would
like to use quotation. There are a bunch of different options that
you can play around with. You can center
line, you can write a line, you can left a line. And there are many other things. I think this could come in handy when you're
adding testimonials, you're trying to add feedback, exact coat that your client or your customers left
for your product or service that you
offered to them. Or you could just leave a tweet of the author
of the block post.
23. Testimonial Carousel Element - Build Trust by Adding Customer / Client Reviews: Let me show you another element which is testimonial carrousal. Let me just search for
testimonial carrousal. This is what we are
going to see right here. I'll add a new section,
Flexbox, vertical direction. Now when we go to
the style part, you'll find one more option
which is shaped divider, which we haven't used earlier. Let's try to use it here. You have top and
bottom from top, I would like to have
some a shaped divider. Here you have split
arrow book and many different kinds of
options to choose from. Let's try to make use of split. I can choose the color to green. Let's see how it looks. So you can see it splits. If I want it to be bottom
from bottom, it splits. I can change the width. As I increase the width, you can also see that height and all those things increases. I can change, let's say tilt. What happens if I
change this to tilt? You can see the height could
be something like this. All right, also let me just increase the size
of the entire container. Full width and height to
be the entire height. 100 is what we are
going to choose, take up the entire height. Coming back to the style
we have our shape divider, We would make this height to be about 500.
About this much. Fine, let's drop down. Or we could increase this. It doesn't mean that
it stops at 500. If the slider, when
you move towards the right most side and
you see the value five, it doesn't mean that
it stops at 500. If I add something like 800, you can see it still
goes. It doesn't matter. You can just increase, or maybe increase this to
65650 is not good enough. Let's strike a 75750 is exactly what we
should be looking for. All right, you can see exactly our entire container has been divided into two parts. This left bottom left triangle,
which is white in color. And then we have the
top right triangle, which is green in color. All right, let's try to add our testimonial
carousal here. I'm going to place it
right here in the center. Now let's try to arrange
the items center, it appears right here. What I'll do instead, instead of this thing appear, right, the shape
divider right here. I can change the angle of this. I can just flip this, so
it can appear right here. I could even
decrease the height. Let's make it a 400 or so. I think 380 would look good. Let's keep this as 380, Fine. Now for this
testimonial carousal, obviously we want to
showcase the reviews, the positive reviews
from our clients or customers who have purchased our services or our products. We would like to showcase those happy feedback
to our new prospects. Here you can see
different slides. It is automatically sliding. You can change the timing of it, and I'll show you each
and every one of them. Here you have item one. You can change the content. You can even add images
to each and everyone. Let me add some images. We have few. We can add
them in the circle avatar. Let's give this guy
named John Doe. The second one, we'll
keep this lady, she looks very happy, so we'll give her name. Emily. Emily Blunt. She is CMO of a company. Let's just give this a CMO. Let's add one more image. I'm going to keep this guy, and I will give him
name, Will, Will Smith. Okay, it looks like Will Smith. So I'm going to keep
this as Will Smith. He is CEO of a
company. Ceo, CTO. And CMO are the three
titles that we have. Or you could even change
this to something like Founder. All right. You can even add items, you can make a
duplicate of them. I don't have to teach about it. Again, you can change
the skin type, the text that you
have, the review that you have in
the Lorimpsu text. You can change that
from default to bubble. If you change this to bubble, you'll find that this will appear like in a
chat box format. Fine. But you wouldn't
find that a little arrow, simply because the
background color, which we have is not gray. Let's set this to somewhat
like a darker gray. About this color
would look good. Now you can see the chat
box icon appearing fine. Let's go back to
our testimonial. You have different layout. Either you can set your
image in line with the text of the person
and their position, or you can stack them such
that the image will appear at top and the name and the position of that
person will go down. Or else you can keep
this as image above, which basically means
that all the information about the person will appear at top and review the feedback
will appear at bottom. If I make this as image left,
this is how it will look. If I make this as image right,
this is how it will look. Let's keep this as image
left because it looks good. Here, you can change
the alignment. If I make this as left a line, you'll find that the feedback
becomes left a line. If centerline or right a line. The text book change, let's keep as center line. We also have slides per view. If I can add three
slides per view, this is how it will appear. We can do two, we can
even add ten, and so on. Let's just keep one
feedback per slide. We have slides to scroll. How many slides do
we want to show? Depending on that you can show. Now you can even change
the width of this. You can make the text
compact by dropping down the feedback width. Or you could even
set this to default. By going in the
additional sections, additional options section,
you'll find arrows. If I just close this, you will find that the
arrow disappeared. If I toggle this, you'll find
a little arrow right here. You also have pagination at the bottom, you
have three dots. You can change this to fraction, which basically means
that total three are there and currently
you are on the first one. If you would like to
make this as a progress, you'll find that the progress
bar appears at the fine. Here you have the topmost part. If I click on next, you'll see progress bar reaches
up to this point. If I go to the last progress
bar, touches the end. Let's keep this as dots. You can change the
transition duration and you can even change
the autoplay speed. Would like to keep
this as autoplay. If you do not want, you
can just toggle this off. You also have infinite loop. You can pause on
whenever you are hovering your cursor around
any of the feedback, the autoplay wouldn't happen. You also have pause
on interaction. That means whenever
someone clicks on it or when
someone is crawling, then this slide automatically. Here you have the
image resolution which should be set to full. You also have lazy road, but let's not touch this part. Fine. Coming to the style part, you'll find different
space between them. You'll find border color, border width, border
radius, content. Coming to the content part,
obviously you can change the typography to
poppins image part, you can change the sizing. If I increase the size, this
is how it will look find. If I change the gap between
the name and the image, this is how the
change will appear. I can change the border
radius for the image. If I want this to
have rounded edges, I can move my slider
towards right. Or if I would like to
give this as sharp edges, I can move my slide
towards left. But let's just keep this as
default, which is circular. Here in the navigation part, you'll find two buttons
left and right. You can increase or decrease the size of the buttons as well. You could change
the color of them. You could add pagination size. Also, whether you want dots to appear at the
bottom to be a little bit larger or smaller
by changing the bubble, what you can do, you can
just give to the bubble. You can add some
padding if you want. You can add a border if
you want, and so on. Fine, I hope you get the
point about the entire thing. Coming to the
content. Right here, you'll find the text which
is there, right here. We can change this to Poppins. Let's try to do this. You can find that Pops is
applied right here. Fine. I hope you
guys get the point. As one more thing that
we can add to this, we can just go back right
here inside the content, we can add some
border to the bubble. If I add some border, let me just give
this border a color. I can give this as green. This is a background color.
This is not a border color, but this is a background color. Let me just make the
default settings here. You have border, we'll just
toggle this border here, you'll see that black
border has been applied, but we do not want black color. Instead we want the green color. This border could be increased or decreased depending on our use case scenario. We'll unselect this part. We'll go to advanced right here. In the advanced part, you'll
find border right here. You can even add border to the entire testimonial
carousalre. If I add a solid, what happens? Border around the entire
thing would show up. I would like to give border
to a specific direction only. I can do that also by just
adding about this much. I can change the
border color to green. This is how it will look. I can add a border Us if I want, but it won't make sense. I can even add a box shadow. You can see box shadow. But let me just reset it. Back to default. This is exactly how our testimonial
carousal section works.
24. Pricing Table Element - Display Service Pricing in Tiers Format: Let's start off with
another element. I'll create a new section. We want the flex box
direction to be horizontal. Here, I will add a container. I'll make duplicate of these containers before I
even add another container. First let's just adjust the height of this container
to be about 100 H, fine. It takes up the entire height. Now let's add some
a background to this classic image and this
is what I will select. We want no repeat and
display size to be cover. Enlarge the entire
image so that it fits the width and height
of our container already. Now let's add container
and we'll make duplicate of these such that we have three
columns right here. Essentially what we're trying
to build is we are trying to create price
table for a website, service page, Any size product that you might have looked into. They offer a service page, right? A pricing page. In that pricing page, they have three different tiers
of their pricing. One would be the basic advanced
and the pro level tier. Here we are going to
achieve something similar. You'll find title,
you'll find description, you'll find a background color. You have a label, you
have your pricing, whether it is monthly
or yearly subscription. You have different
features listed out. You have your pattern and some some text which you can place right below your pattern. Let's
try to edit this. I'll just click on this and pricing table edit
option will appear. Now instead of Enter your title, we can change this to something. Let me make this as
a diamond package. This is like a diamond package. Then we can change
the description. We can just keep this
as our description. We can change the title tag
to H two or anything else, but let's just keep three. Coming to the pricing part, we can change the
symbol to dollar, Euro, any currency
that you are using. So we can even change
this to Rupee, but I would like to keep
this as dollar now. I can change the price. Instead of 39.99 I can change
it to 59 99 if I want. All right, here I can
change the currency format. Now what is the
difference between this format and this format? If I change this,
you'll find that the cents part is
appearing after that decimal point or you could make use of
the default one. All right, so this
would look good. Here you have the sale also, what happens if I toggle
between the sale? So if I toggle with sale, original price will
be slashed down and the new price will
be displayed right here. I can keep the original
price to be around 99. All right. I can
change the period, whether I want this to be a monthly subscription
plan or yearly. I can keep this as
yearly or monthly. Let me make this as monthly. You can even make
this quarterly. Here you have a
list of features. You can even change the icon instead of using
a circular check. I can just make use
of this box tick or just a simple tick. I can just search for T or
check here I have this check. I can select this, I can change the color
of the icon to green. And here, instead of
list item as one, I can make this as one domain. I can make a replica of this. So I can just copy and
paste it multiple times. Instead of one domain, I can list the other
features as 100 B, 100 GB of bandwidth bandwidth. All right, and the last feature, we can say something like
100 website hosting. This is like a pricing table for any kind of hosting
service provider. It could be hosting side ground. I'm just trying to, you know, list down the features
that they offer. Here you have 100 GBs of
Pan with hundred website hosting and the icon which
is check. All right. You can even rearrange
them if you want. I can just place
this right here. One domain can appear
at the bottomost part. You can even add something like SSL certificate,
SSL certificate. First, let me just make
a duplicate of this. I'll cross this
out. Ssl cert fate. All right, what
are the features? Do hosting or provides? Let's just find that out here. I'll go to Web hosting. Once I scroll down, you
can find that there are unlimited options to list down in terms of features we have
CDN and stuff like that. We can add another element. Let's try to make a
duplicate of this. I can add something like CDN free CDN instead
of call cross, or I can just say cancel. Do we have cancel? No, we don't. Do we have the cross? The cancel? I cannot find that. Let's search for wrong. Okay, we cannot find that also. What would be the
icon for cross? Let's try to find for cross. Okay, I can't find
the cross icon, so I'll just leave it as it is. All right, here we have
these different features. We have a footer also right here in footer we have the button
instead of click here, we can say by now, by now we can provide link. Dynamic link also could be provider in terms of
additional information. We can say something like 30, the money back guarantee. All right here, this is the text that we can add in additional
information as well. Coming to the ribbon part, you can even change the text of ribbon if you
would like to show, you can show or else
you can toggle it off. You can change the
position as well, but I would like to
keep it as it is fine. Coming to the styling part, you can change the
color of the background here instead of black. We can change
something like green. Here, we have
green. I can change the color of the title to
something like black here. Black could be applied,
but let's just make this as white
for typography. Let's change this to poppins. All right, for the size also, we could also increase or
decrease the size of our title. Right here, I think about 35 pixels would
look just fine, Fine. Coming to the
subtitle part again, we can play around with this
by changing this to Poppins. We'll just use the default one, or we could even remove the description if
we do not want it. Pricing part, we can
change the color to black. This is the background,
by the way. We can clear this out,
we can add padding. If we can change the color
of the font to black, it's dark, then you
have typography again, Let's change this to poppins. All right, so this is
how it will appear. Now coming to the
currency symbol, you can even reduce or increase
the size of this symbol. I think 50 pixels
looks just fine. Now, what should be the
position of the dollar, whether you want it to be
left a line or right a line? I think left a line
would look good. How do you want the
vertical position to be? The dollar sign should appear at the top middle or at the bottom. I think Bottom middle. All three of them looks good. In my opinion, I would just use the top position coming
to the fractional part. If I increase this,
you'll find that the 99 part also increases
or decreases. All right. So I can just make
this around 40. I can even change
the position of it, 59, 99. I think this looks good. Or bottom the bottom,
it looks good. Let's just keep this as top. All right, here we
have original price. We can make this as red, let's keep this as dark red. We'll change the font to pins. We can also increase
the size of this. All light 99. Was the
original price typography set to poppins, is it not? Okay, so this is
for period. Okay? The monthly period that we have, we can even set the position
of our original price. It's set to bottom. We can
change this to middle or top. Bottom is the best way to
represent the original pricing. We can change the
color of the period, which I will, the gray
color which it has. We'll change the color, we'll keep this as font color, but we'll change the
font style to poppins. Let's search for pins we have used and we can place
it below or besides. I think besides, look good. I'll just place it right here. Coming to the features
part here again, you can change
background color for each and every feature here. You can do something
like this, but I would like to make use
of the default one. I can add padding, I can
change the color of the text. I can even change
the typography. I can change this to
something like poppins. I can change the
alignment line, right, a left aline center
line. Looks good. I can increase the
width of it if I want, but let's just make use
of the default one. I can add divider
in between them. Okay, Here I had an
option to add divider. I can choose between
different dividers, solid, double, either dashed dotted, and make use of any of them. I can even choose the
color of the divider. I can increase the weight of it, but two is perfect,
decrease the width of it. I can change the gap
between the features. Here in the foot apart,
you would find this part, the button and this text. We can play around with
the background color, the padding, We can increase or decrease the
sizing of the button. If I make this small, I think
this would be the best. If I have the button as small
I can change the effect click if I hover around my cursor around this
particular button. If I change this text color, or rather background color
of the button to green. Let's see what happens
if I bring my cursor. Ideally, it should happen. Let's try to save this now, text color, we want
this to be white. Let's try to view the changes
here if I scroll down. To this part. Okay, why is it
not appearing in the hover? We have this color,
fine background type should be classic border color. We do not want to give any
border color text color. We want this to be
white, obviously. But why is it not
appearing okay? We can even change
the animation of it on hover if you want. I'm not going to
touch into this part. Here we have some additional
information which we can style it differently. Here we can change the
typography to poppins. I can increase or decrease the margin for the ribbon part, which is this popular part. I can change the color
of the label, All right. I can even set the distance from where exactly
you would like to place this particular label. I'll just make this as default. I can choose the color
of the text inside this. I can even change the
typography of it to poppins. I can even add some box
shadow to this label. This looks good, fine. Now, once we have done
the entire thing, what can we do about this?
We can duplicate this. Let's make a duplicate of it. And by the way, in
the advanced tab, you'll find all the
other options that is there for other elements. Also, right here for
the entire container, I'll make a duplicate
of this container. Again, make a duplicate of it and I'll delete the
other containers. Fine, let's delete other
containers now for this part, for this particular
diamond package, I would not like to
display the ribbon. I'll just remove this ribbon
for first and last one. I would just like to keep
this for the middle one here. I can change the package title to something like let's just say titanium here
instead of diamond. I can place this as platinum. We can even change
the pricing of this. For the titanium one,
we can go to pricing, Instead of 59, 99, we can make this as 299. This is like the
most expensive one. We can change the
original pricing also. Instead of making the
original pricing S 98, we can make this as 599. For the platinum one,
we can make this as 129 and the
original to be 200. All. I'm not going
to go in detail about changing the
features list. You can do that on your own, but what I would like to do is I would like to arrange
the items in center. Let's just go and click
on the entire container. We'll go to Layout
and we'll justify content and align
items center, fine. By aligning the items center, what essentially happened
is that the container, whatever container
element it had, it adjusted its
height accordingly. And that it adjusted its position to center
with respect to the y axis of our outermost container of this particular Flexbox section. I hope you guys get the point about creating different
pricing tables.
25. Animated Headline Element - Boost Your Title Appearance with Cool Animations: Let's try to add
animated headline to this section
of pricing table. Now, this part is going
to get a little tricky, not because the element
that we are going to use, but the way we are going to arrange the elements
in this section. Pay attention to this
lecture very carefully. As you know that this flex box has a horizontal direction. We have put this
pricing table element inside each container, we have three containers, container one, container
two, and container three. Now we would like to give,
or rather I should say, we would like to add another
container so that we can fit our animated
headline at the top. Fine, another container inside which we will have
these three containers. For that, let me just change the flex box
layout to vertical. For now, just pay attention
to this very, very carefully. I'll click on Ad Element. I'll bring my container outside. We'll just make sure that this container which we have right here, it is
not part of this. I can just click on Structure. You can find that the empty
container which we have, it is part of a nested
container which has pricing table also,
which we do not want. We can just drag and
place it right below. We can just and place it right above this existing container
with pricing table. Fine. Now we have this one. Now we would like to also
add one more container. Let's try to duplicate this
by just duplicating this. We can drag and place this
container inside this. Here we have two containers
in this flex box, the outermost container one
and outermost container two. Fine. Assume that
this is a flex box. Inside flex box we
have two Amazon boxes. Amazon box one, Amazon box two. Now inside this Amazon box, we have one box from Walmart, the other box from Best Pi, and the other box from
some other vendor. All right. Let me just
drag and place it right inside this here. Let me just open up
a structure here. We have the container
inside which we have one container
with pricing table. And here we have another
container with pricing table. They are not nested,
they are individual one. You can see the structure
right here, Right here. We have the third container
which is not part of it. You can see the alignment
is a bit different. Let's try to place
it right right here to be a part of this. I can just arrange it like this, and you can find that all three
appears in one container. Now, this box, this container will be set to horizontal.
This is how you will appear. But you'll find that diamond
should appear first, Platinum should
appear in the last, and titanium should
appear in center. Let's try to rearrange them. We can set right here. What I'll do, I'll just
click on Structure. By right clicking on this, Titanium should appear in
middle, which is the last one. Let's play Set right above, Titanium will appear here. The last one, which is diamond, should appear first.
We'll do this. Platinum will go in last. Platinum will go in last. Okay, what happened? We need
to first make sure that all of the structures
are collapsed fine. Diamond, then titanium
should come up. Titanium is right here. We'll place it here and you'll find that this is our
arrangement is fine. Now we'll add our
animated headline. Let's search for
animated headline. I'll drag and place
it right here. You'll find that this is our
text with the last word. There was some circle
animation going around. Let's just change
the text first that this page has pricing table. All right, what should
be the highlighted text? Let's remove this one. And let's make use of
the pricing table. Fine, Here you have, this page has pricing table. You can even add after text. That means after
highlighting this, what should it display? You can even add it.
Do you want it to go with an infinite loop?
You can check this box. How long do you want
this animation to last? Do you want any kind of delay? You can add all those
values in milliseconds. You can even add some
link if you want. I'm not going to, I can
change the title tag to two. I'll go to styling. I'll change
the color of this shape. The highlight is one
animation option. By going to the content part, I can change between different
animations that I have. Instead of highlight, I can
change this to rotating. It will type down the
text, something like this. You'll find it like
this instead of style. As rotating, we can
change animation type. Do you want to be typing? Do you want this to be clip? What happens if we have clip? Let's find out, here's how
it will display the text. You also have flip,
we'll flip the text. Let's see, Flip,
vertically happens. You have swirl, it
flips like this. Then you have blinds
display like this. Then you have drop in wave, you have slide down. I think typing would look best. Let's make this a typing. Here you have different
rotating text we can. This page table, all right. This page has
pricing table, fine. Here you have after text also, which we are going to
keep this as empty. After going to the style tab, we'll choose the headline color. Let's make this as white
coming to the typography. Let's set this to Poppins. We can add text. If we can even change the color
of the animated text. Animated text could
be something like, let's add light gray tone. We can add a light
gray tune right here. We could change the form
family of this to Poppins. We can change the
selection color. Also here you have
different selection color, which we are not
going to touch again. Coming to the
advanced tab is same as the other. Let's publish. We can view the changes by scrolling down
to our web page. Let's refresh this, and
once you scroll down here, you'll find your page that
this page has pricing table. All right, so this
is how it appears. Now you might find
that it selects the entire text and the background color
changes to black. It's because we don't
have an after text. Let's try to change after text. Like something like this page has pricing table or something like elementor pro element. What happens is that
in between you want some text to be changed,
you can do that. You can even change rotating text instead of pricing table. You can make this elementor pro. What happens now?
Let's see here. This page has pricing table. Let us allow to type it out. Here, you can find
the entire thing. Here we can go to styling. We can choose selected text. The text which is
being selected, that will be shown currently, it is set to some
default settings, which is black in color. If I change this to something around white, let's
see what happens. You can see the entire text
was selected to white. You can add some other
kinds of color if you want. You can change the color of the text and so on and so forth. Fine, I hope to get
the point about adding animated headline
to your section.
26. FlipBox Element - This is unique!: All right, let's
try and make use of another element
which will be flip box. I'm going to add a new section. We'll keep this layout. Let's increase the height
to about 05:50 pixels. Fine. We'll change
the background color. Let's give it an image here.
I'll select this image. Find I can even make this cover and do not
repeat it. Do not repeat. And here we have the image. Now inside this, first
of all, wait a second. Instead of making use
of this right here, this image could be used
in background overlay. Right here, we'll go
in background overlay. Classic Select the same image, same settings would be applied. That means we want
the display to be cover, repeat, repeat. The opacity would be a
little bit more to about 18. Now this is what we want. Let's add one element
which is called flip box. I'm going to drag and
place it right here. Now once I place it, I can first center align this by justifying the content
and aligning items center. Now you will find that this has a heading description and
a button and it flips, right, So it has two sides. Now this could come in handy
when you are trying to offer some service and you
just don't want to fit all the content in
the entire card itself. You can add some flip
kind of in effect here. You can display a few things. Now, this wouldn't
necessarily be something similar to what we have
done in pricing table, because price table has
listed down all the features. But this would be
just a brief overview about what the service
is all about, right? You can find the use case, whatever works best for you. And this flip will
only happen on hover. Whenever you move your cursor towards this element,
the flip will happen. And when you bring back your
cursor outside this element, the flip will take packet's
original position fine. Inside this particular flip
box, you have content. Here you have the content, and here you have
the background. Here we can change the background
to classic or gradient. I can choose the image, so let me select this
image as my background. Now once I've done this, I can select background overlay. Also here I can choose
different colors if I want. And what I would like to add is an image instead
of the star icon. I can go to the content. And instead of making
use of the icon, which is right here, let me first search for the
elementary icon. Do we have? Yes, we
do. Let's insert the elementary icon
itself right here. Or else I could just
click on Image and bring back the elementary image, which I have right
here. You can see. But the image size is way too large and I have to adjust it. Instead of doing it, I can keep this as really
small about medium. Working around the settings
of it would not be feasible. So let's just make use
of this elementary icon. All right, once we
have done this, we can view this in
a stacked format. This is the view of stacked, so that means it will
have some circle. Or you could have a
framed option as well. You have different options now, do you want the
frame to be circle? Do you want it to be square? Do you want the stack to be in a square format or
in a circle format? You can choose between
different options. All right, I'm going
to go ahead with this option now. Here
you have the heading. I can change this to
Elementor pro, fine. I can give description
something like five stars to this course just for the
description purpose. Five stars to this course. And I am enjoying
watching this course. All right, here we
have some description. Here you have back
also in the content. So that means once you flip what the content
should display here, we can choose between
different backgrounds. You can play around
different settings. Here you can change the different title
tags that you have. For title, you can
place H one and H23. Now that will help
in SEO purposes. Here you have your description
title which you can set to span tag or you can adjust
the height and accordingly, let me just make it default. You can add border radius more. I bring this towards the right, you'll find that
the entire flip box turns in a captual format. I can change this back
to somewhat ten or 12. 12 is way too small. We can just make it about 16. Let's see how it looks
like on 2020. Looks good. I'll just make this as 20. Now, what effect
I want for flip? Do I want this to
be flip like this? Do I want it to be slide? What happens when
I move my cursor? You can see it
appears like this. That's the slide
effect you have. Push if I. My cursor. It pushes the
original content to up. That's effect. You have zoom in. It zooms in, you have zoom out like this.
You also have fade. Very simple effect. Let's just keep this slide. What happens if we have flip? You have directions also for
each and every direction. You want it to be a flip
vertical to the top. Do you want it to be
bottom? This a flip? Do you want it to be right side like this or to left like this? You can even change that. I
will choose this as right. We can even give this
as three D depth. Let's see what happens when
I choose as three D depth. If I bring my cursor,
you'll see that it's having a byte
kind of a thing. Let me just bring out any of the object I have near me here. I have this remote, I can
just flip this around. This is how the flip
will actually work. Fine. This is the three D depth, again for the effects and animation for the pricing table. Also, if you go back, not for pricing
table, but I would say animated headline here. We discussed that in rotating, we have different
options for animations, but we do have highlighted
also here you have circle. You also have curly. You might not find the color of the curly to be very appealing because it's red and the background gradient
color is also red. Let me just change the color of the shape to be about white
so that it will be visible. Here you would find curly, you would find underline would
be at the top and bottom. Both sides, you have
double underline, zigzag, you have diagonal,
it will be a cross. Now you can bring
this in front also, instead of appearing, making
this appear back the text, you can also make this
appear in front by just going to the style
selecting this toggle option. Bring to front and
you'll see that this text is slash down. You can have rounded edges. Also you have other
like strike through. You have X also, it will cross down your text. Fine, but we'll keep
this as rotating and typing effect for
the animated headline. This was just a
few things that I missed out in the
previous video. Now in this part where I have this flip effect
for the flip box, what other options do I have in the style tag, in the style tab? I can choose between
different colors of my text. In the headline, I
have the text color set to white typography. I can change this to poppins. I can grease the font size
to something about 35. I can even change
the text stroke. I can change the animated text also to white. Let's
see what happens. I can change the typography
again to poppins. I have text stroke,
I have select. Okay. All those things was happening for the animated text. My bad. All those things
happening for animated headline. But we are working around the flip box. Let's go to style. And here you would find different alignments
for your flip box. I can make it left,
right, center line. I can change the position to be center to the top
or in the middle. Let's make this as middle. I can even set the border type. Do I want it to be solid? Do I want it to be double? Do I want it to be
dashed dotted and so on. But for now, let's just
keep this as right now, you wouldn't find dotted border because we haven't
added border width. If I do add border width, you'll find that
there is some border. I can change the color to white, and now you'll find
dotted borders across the entire flip box. Right? We can just make
this default here. You would find some
spacing around your icon. You could also change
the color of the text. The icon primary color
could be changed, and the secondary icon
color can also be changed. But let's just bring
this back to default. You have the icon size which
you can adjust accordingly. Let me just bring
it back to default. You can add padding to this. You can rotate this icon. You can add radius, border radius around your icon. You can add some spacing between your title
and your icon. You can change the color of your title to white so
that it would be visible. Now, coming to the
description part, you can change this
to this part white. Again, you can set the typography for both your
title and your description. Right here we have text color, you can find text
color to white. Also, whenever I move my
cursor anywhere in the color, this is changing the color of my button. You can
find right here. Okay, this is happening
when we are under back, we have two options in
style, front and back. In the back part,
once you scroll down, you would find the
color of the button. You can reset this. You can change the border color
instead of white. You can change this to any other color that you
would like to give. You can add border
radius as you could add some border width so that the border appears to
be a little bit fat. And you could change the color of the text of description. You could even change
the color of the text of the heading to white. All right. You can change the typography to poppins for all the
texts that you saw, either in front and
back, for both of them. Here you have the title. You
can change this to white. Here is how it looks like. Fine, I hope you get the
point about working around. Flip box in element or pro.
27. Slides, Media Carousel & Gallery Elements - Content Packed Video!: Guys, now I'd like to move
things forward really fast. In this video, we'll cover three elements provided by
element or pro, plug in. First we'll look into
the slides element, then we'll see the gallery, and then the media carousal. Let's add a new flex box. It doesn't matter what
direction you have set, but we just want one container. We can make this as
horizontal Here, I will add the slides element. I can just drag and
drop it right here. Now you would find there
is some title text, the description text, a
button in the middle. Now at the bottom,
you would find three ellipses, three dots, which represents how many slides are there for this element. In the left and
right directions, you would find arrows which will help you
to navigate between different slides that
your entire element has. Now, when could
this come in handy? Let's say you are
trying to build a hero section for
your E Commerce band, where you are showcasing
different products that you sell or maybe
different services that you offer
that could come in handy when you are
building a product page. And that product page needs
to have a hero section. Hero section could be
this, a slide format. Now if I try to publish this, let's see how this looks like. If I scroll down to this part, you might find that the width is not being occupied correctly. The width is not set 200%
How can we change this? We can just close this pop up. Go back to our
Elementor settings, select your Flexbox layout, select the Layout tab. And in the content width, we'll need to click
on Full Width. Now if I save this, mind it very well, I have not changed this in the
slide settings. I've changed this in the
container settings, right? If I scroll down to the part
where I have my slider, you'll see that the entire
width is being taken up. Right? Let's go back now. I can change the
content if I want. If I click on the next arrow, you'll find that there is
some animation going around. There is some background color, and the text animation also appears nicely from
bottom to top. All right, there are a few things that
we can change here. If you would like
to add more slides, you can just click
on the add item. If you'd like to make
a duplicate of them, you can select the
document icon. If you would like
to remove them, you can just click
on the cross icon. Let's try to expand and
see what each and every slide offers in terms
of design layout. If I click on it, you can change the background color or
you can add an image. Let me add an image here. I have three different
product images. First, I'll add this image. Once I add this, the settings are applied for the first slide. You can see right
here, Initially we were in the second slide. You just need to navigate
between different slides. Now, the size display option
would be set to cover. What happens if I
change this to contain? You know the difference
between contain and cover. Obviously, you can see that
how it occupies the width. If I make this as auto, it will automatically adjust the sizing so that
it is zoomed in. But we don't want
that to happen, so we can just set
it back to cover. We can play around with
different effects. Here we have the
Ken Burns effect. Let's try to toggle
and see what happens. What happens in Ken Burns effect is that you
can see there is some slight zoom effect going around whenever
the slide is active. There is some zoom
direction which you can set if you want this
to be zoomed in. Zoomed out, you can choose between different options
that you would like, but I think zoom in
would look good. If you would like to add
some background overlay, you can even do that. This image is there
in the background, but the image has shade going around so that the
text becomes visible. Otherwise it wasn't previously. You can see the white text and the bright colored background
image with full saturation, full transparency and
all those kinds of things was not working
with the text that we had. Let's add background overlay. Now you can change between
different blend modes. Now, what is blend mode? If you've worked
around different photo editing software
like Photoshop or even if you have gone
through UX course on Figma, you must have learned
about blend mode. What happens if I
choose multiply? If I change this to screen? If I go back to the first
slide, let's see what happens. There are multiple
different options. You can dark, you
can make this light, you can play around the saturation levels of
it and stuff like that. If I play around
the saturation for the first background
overlay image, find that transparency. And the saturation is set such that the background appears
something like this. It is not that bright, it is not very dark, but somewhere in between,
it's giving like an old photo an effect, right? But let's just keep
this as normal. You can play around
between different options you have as well. Okay? You have color, you have exclusion,
you have luminosity. You can play around
between different options. I can choose normal, because I think this
works fantastic. In our case, I can choose different settings
for my first slide. Here I have background,
which we selected. Moving on to the content part, you can change the
title of this slide. Let's make this as Soaps. I can change the
description if I want. I can change the
text of my button. Let me just make this as by now. You can see by now button
appears right here. You can add some link, or you could add a dynamic tag to the link so that
it will automatically link to a new post or a new page which
you have linked to. Now, same things could be
applied for other slides too. If I go to the styling
part of the first slide, you'll find that there is
one toggle which is custom. Let's see what
happens right here. Here you have an option to rearrange the
content that you have. We have horizontal position.
Now what does it mean? All the things that we have
in terms of content with respect to the X axis,
they can be changed. I think you all can agree
right now that X axis, which is horizontal, Y
axis is vertical, right? Right now, center align
with respect to horizontal. That means content
appears right here. If I make this left line,
it will appear right here. If I make it right aline, it will appear right here. Fine. If I choose this or this, the content will
work accordingly. Let's make this left aline or right aline in the
first slide case, because you can see
that the product appears left hand side. Obviously, it makes sense to move our text to the
right hand side. I can change the vertical
position as well. I can make this middle
top or towards the end. I can even align my text. Whether I want it to
be right aligned, I want it to be center
align and so on. But I think, right,
Aline works well, because we want the
text to be shown only to the blank area
of our product page. The background product image. Fine. You can change the
color of your content. You can add some text
shadow if you want. You can play around
the typography of it by just clicking on this. You can play around blur,
horizontal, vertical, and all. Or you could reset it
back to default settings. Fine if you scroll down in
the content part itself. Here we were working
around the slides part. Now what other
option do we have? We have slider options, one which you can
see at the bottom. We have ellipsis option, right? Or the dots, which we
can see arrows and dots. Here you have autoplay option. That means it will
automatically keep on changing. Or you could have some
of this pause on hover. That means whenever my cursor is hovering around that
particular slide, the slide wouldn't change. If I click on it or if I to any kind of
keyboard activity, then the interaction
would be paused. Here you have auto
play speed as well. In milliseconds, 5,000
is milliseconds. Here you have an infinite loop. That means it will keep
on scrolling even after it has gone through the
slide number three. It will again start
from scratch, which is from slide number one. Here you have transition, whether you want it to be slide or you want it to be fade. What happens if we have fade? Let's just see here. You would find that it will
show up a fade animation. You can see right
here. And you can even change the speed of this
particular transition. Now how do you want the
content animation to be up, down, left, right, Zoomed in. You can play around between
different animation types. Here you can see the animation
of the text comes down. This was for the content part. Okay, here initially we had
the up, so we can do that. Also, we can play around
different navigation types. What we discussed right now
was for arrows and dots. Let's see if we
have just arrows, then we wouldn't find
dots at the bottom. What if we just have dots? Wouldn't find arrows in the
left and right directions. But if we have
none of the above, then we would manually
have to swipe through. If I move my cursor
from right to left, then obviously it would
change to the next slide. If I move my cursor, if I press and hold
my mouse button and I move my cursor
from left to right, then it will select the
previous slide like this. I hope you get the point. Now let's just make use of arrows or just do
whatever works for you. Even if you would
like to keep this as arrows and dots,
you can do that. Going to the style tab, you'll
find different options. Whether you want to play
around the content with, whether you want to
add padding around it. Whether you want to
align position of this. If I make this as
horizontal position center, right, you can find
different things. What happens for the slide?
You can see right here, you can see that the
content position changes. Here you have vertical position. Also you can align
the text and so on. Here in the title part, you can change the typography
color of the text, play around The spacing
description could be same for button which
we have right here. Here you can change between
different button sizes. Again, add some typography
to your button. You can play around
the border width. If you want the border to
be a little bit fatter, you can move the
cursor towards right. If you want the
border to be thin, then you can move the
cursor towards left cursor, or I should say slider
if you would like to add rounded buttons. You can increase
the border radius. You can change the
effects on normal and how you can play between
different navigation. Do you want the arrows to be
inside this or outside this? If you keep this outside, then you can change the
arrow of the colors. Since the background of
the container is white, we can make the arrows as black. I just reset this and I'll
place my arrows inside. Right here you also can see pagination which is
the three dots right here. Do you want this to
be inside or outside? Play around them. You can
change the sizing of it. You can choose the color
of your pagination. The dots at the bottom, you can play around
the different colors that you can set for active. The first two slides
which are not showing up on our screen are
not active state. They are like in an gray shade. The one which is being active, which is slide number three, is in a dark black dot. That's what we have right
here in the style tab. Going to the advanced tab again, you would find the same things which you have seen earlier. All I'm not going to go
in depth slides also, I'm not going to waste my time doing the same things which
we have done for slide one. For slide 2.3 also, I hope get the point. All right. Now, what else we need to cover? Okay, this was for
the slides element. Let's add one more element
which is the gallery element. I'll add another flex box
with a downward direction. I'm going to add gallery. Let me search here. You have basic gallery
and a simple gallery. I think both of the functionalities
are pretty similar. There is not much
difference in it now. Basically the gallery element allows you to showcase
all your work. Now, this could come in handy if you're building a
portfolio website, a personal portfolio website, or just trying to showcase
all your client work. The projects works whatever
you have done so far or you're just trying to
display all the images. Let's just say that you are a photographer and you're
displaying all the images. Wildlife photography images
or beautiful scenery images, You can just select multiple images from the
media library or you could upload them or insert the image from
a different URL. Or you could add and create video playlist and audio playlist and other
things like that. Here I can just hold
my command key, form systems and control
key for window systems. And I can select multiple
images and you would find multiple images which are selected right
here at the bottom so I can create a new gallery. I can even reverse the order. If I want, I can rearrange them, I can add caption to
each and every image. If I want, I can insert
them as a gallery. Here you would find that we have four columns in one single row. Fine, I can play
around with it here. You will find the type
to be single multiple. What happens if I
choose this multiple? Then obviously we are not going to see all
the images right here. Let's just first see all the settings that we have
for the single type here. You can order them by
default or random here, you can enable or
disable the load. Lazy load basically means that
the images won't be loaded from the very first go. That means whenever you
click on your website, the images won't
be loaded first. Once you scroll down
and once you reach to the part where the
images should be shown, then the loading will happen. That way, the performance
of the website could increase to some extent. That's what you
have in lazy load. You can play around the
different layout settings. Here it is set to grid. What happens in justified? Here you'll see the
justified format, that means the image size is perfectly shown what
happens in machinery. In machinery, you'll also
find the same thing because the dimensions of all the
images are pretty same. But if you have few images which are having some other
height and width dimensions, then it will adjust
the height and width of rows and
columns appropriately. Here you can set the
number of columns. I can drop it down
to two so that it will enlarge the
photos appropriately. Here you can add some spacing
between different elements. If I move my slide
towards right, you'll find that the
spacing increases. It happens a bit slower, but you can just
play around with it. You can add some link to this. You could add a light box. What happens if
I'll add lightbox? Let me just select this. Yes. If I click or hover
around any of the images, you can find that the
image turns a bit darker. If I click on it, the
image will expand and you can view the
entire image properly. That's what light
box actually means. Let me just click on the Element so that we can see
different settings. You can play around the different image
resolution that you have. Here you have an overlay. What overlay do
you want to have? Some a background. Do you want to add some title to
each and every image? If I hover, do you
see any title? No. If I make this as a title, we can add here, you'll find the title
of the image itself. This is taking up the name which we have set to our image. Add a description, the caption, or the alt text also fine. Let's just make this as non going to the style type
you'll find normal. And obviously you can
add a border width. You can add border radius. You can change the
color of the border. You can add animation. If I hover around my cursor to the image, it will zoom in. It might zoom out. It can
move left, It can move right. It can move up, or
it could move down. I hope you get the point. You can even change the
animation duration. You can change the overlay tiles if you want to add
some blend mode, which we have discussed just right now in the slides element, Something similar could
be done right here. You can change between
different, how animations fine. You can set the animation
overlay duration. You can choose the
content style, whether you want the
text to appear at center left. A line, right? A line at the middle or
at the top or bottom. Do you want some padding
for your content? Do you want to add some
animation for your text? Do you want to give a
sequence animation or so These are the things that you have for your gallery element. Now what happens if
I choose up here, I can add multiple galleries. The gallery that we
created right now for those four people
right inside this gallery, I have this title
for the gallery. Let me just give
this something like people behind the company. All right. I can select
different images. Now, this gallery, the gallery that we used earlier for the single
type was different. It was saved just
for the single type. For multiple, you'll
need to create another gallery right here. You'll need to select again, a bunch of different images. I'll create a gallery. I
can insert that right here, and here you'll find
all the people. I can add multiple
galleries right here. Here I have the filter to click, and only that gallery
would be shown up. Let's say you're a photographer. You photos of models, you click photos of
wildlife and wild animals. You click photos of
cars and products. Here you can and create
different galleries. You can add filters by using the multiple type. All right. You can order them
however you want. I think all the things
after that is pretty same which we have discussed
for the single type. Also, I hope we get the point about using
the gallery element. Let's see what we can do
with the media carousal. Let's add horizontal flex box. We'll add an element
called as media causal. If I drag and drop
it right here, it's working similar to slides. The only difference is here it is working with
our image gallery. For each and every
item you choose, one image or a video. Here I can add three
product images for each and every slide. For the first slide, this product image would be
displayed for the second one. Here I can go to second. I can choose this one. For the third one, I
can select this option, I'll just cancel out the
other two items that I had. Now I can change
the skin of this, whether I want it
to be carousal, whether I want to have a show
an effect slide show will basically show all the photos or gallery elements that
I have at the bottom. And the main, which is being focused right now will be
displayed in full width. Then you have cover flow, which will be like
this, a three D format, which is pretty
cool in my opinion. Here you can set how many slides per view should be shown, how many slides to scroll, what should be the height
and width of this. But if you click on
the additional options right here in the content part, you would find arrows
which you have right here. You can change around the
different pagination elements. You can make this as Autoplay and a bunch of different
things which we have seen earlier in the
slides or slides element. Also, by going to the style tab, I can click on the navigation. And I can change the
color of the arrows to be black for navigation. Here you'll find arrows. The sizing of this is 20 pixels. I can change the color to black so that it will be visible, fine, change the pagination, Whether I want it to
be inside or outside. I can play around different things which we have
already discussed earlier. I hope you get the
point and you have a great grasp and foundation
about the three elements.
28. Reviews Element - Supercharge your Business Website with This!: Right. Now, let
us see how we can make use of the reviews element. Now, the reviews
element is bit similar to what we have seen for
the testimonial element. The only difference the
reviews element would have is it will include ratings. The stars element that
you can see right here. It will have a link to different
social icons right here, just below this product,
Carrousal media. Carousal. I'm going
to add a new section. I will give the
Flexbox layout to be horizontal right
inside this container. I would like to add reviews. Let's just drag and
drop it right here. Now you would find that
this review appears. Now what we can do, just select your
container and make sure that the content
is justified. Center items are also
aligned in center. Coming back to the part where
we have the reviews here, you'll find that the reviews, let me just change
this to full width. Also, I would like to
increase the height. I'm going to increase the
height to about 50 so that you'll see that this
has aligned center here. We have three ellipses here, you have the review
and there are arrow icons at the left
and the right side. Now, you might not find
it very clearly at the first glance simply because the background
color is grey. Let's try to change the
color of the background. I can add one background
overlay with some gradient. Let's try to see how it looks. If I make use of this color, I think it would
just do its job. All right, for the second color. Yeah, let's keep this as
red or maybe drop it down to let's change the color
to somewhat like purple. All right. This is the color scheme
that we'll go ahead with. Fine, here you'll find two
on this one and this one. Now if I click on the Reviews, you'll find we have
three reviews currently. Each and every review shows
up the avatar, their name, the username, and the social
media profile username, along with the icon of social media profile that
it is connected to. Now, when can this come
in handy as compared to the testimonial element
that we have seen earlier? This review looks like
very gimmick or fake. If you include this kind of an element inside
your website to showcase that you have trust
around your customers, then you can actually link social media profiles
to their profiles. Essentially, it's going
to give a vibe off that all these reviews are genuine and these are not fake reviews. If I click on any of the items, let's click on item one here. Let's select this
person's image. This will display right here. And this person's
name is John Doe. I can change the title. This title will represent their username of any of the social media profile
that you're linking it to. Here, just below the image, you'll find the icon. That means whether you
want to link to Instagram or Facebook or Linked in, it depends on what kind of social media profile
they are very active on. You should leave their link. You can leave the link of
their profile right here. Here you have the title. Now this title
could be different, it could be CEO of the company, the company name and
different kinds of things, you can add rating. If I add something like
let's just say four, then you'll see
automatically it shows up total five stars out of which they have given
you four stars. If I give something like six, it's not going to
display because the maximum value that
it holds are five. Now you can even add in
decimal values, basically, if you say something
like 2.12 0.22 0.3 it's not going to
cover the entire star. Once you reach the 2.5 mark, it will cover half of the star. You can see right here
we have 2.5 stars. I would just keep
this as 4.5 We have 4.5 I can change the review
text as well right now. I'll just keep whatever it is. I can change the name, the image for review
two and review three. Also, I can change the name
to Emily Plant. Right here. We can change this to Instagram, because I believe most of the female population
are active on Instagram. Now here you would
find that the color of the icon is black. It's solid, it's not blue, unlike what we saw with Twitter. What can we do about this? You'll find that this
particular icon, Instagram, is following
one, a trend. It is only showing up
this icon where there is the entire wig icon is having black border
and the black lines, you cannot change the color. If you would manually would like to upload any of the icons, then you can click on
this upload and you can browse the file where it
is located in your system. Fine coming back to
this part, item three. I can change this to Will Smith. I'll change the
image to the sky. Now I will link Facebook. All right, here we are. Made use of three
social media profiles, Facebook, Twitter, and
Instagram. All right. I'm not going to
change the review, I'll just keep it,
whatever it says. I can make more items. Also, I can add more items. If I want, I can make
duplicate of it. I could remove some of them. Here I have an option to choose how many slides should
be displayed for view. So what if I have
multiple reviews? Let's say instead of three, I have about six of them. Fine. Only two reviews
should be shown. For the first slide here you
can see we have two reviews. If I scroll here, you'll find another set
of two, then another two. This one was there in
the second slide also. It's repeating for
the third slide. Let's keep on doing
that kind of a thing. Right here you have
the slides per view. Here you have slides to scroll. How many slides can you see? 12,345.6 So here you can drop it down to maybe,
let's just say three. What will happen in that case? Only a few reviews will
be shown correctly. These money reviews
will be shown if you play around the
slides to scroll. Let's make it to default here. You can set the width of each and every review
if you would like to give this small review section, then you can set the width to 80% Here you have
additional options as well, which we have seen in the
media carousal as well, which is to enable or disable the arrow icon right here at the left and right side here. For the Pg nation,
you can either use dots or fraction
or progress bar. Progress bar will appear at top. Fine, for this review, I'll use the pagination. I can set the
transition duration. You can see it's moving pretty fast with about
500 milliseconds. Here you have an option
to play in automatically. You can set the autoplay speed. You can make this infinite
loop or just toggle this off so that it won't keep on changing the reviews
over and over again. If I move my cursor on
any of the reviews, you'll find that it pauses. If I click, then it will
make the same action. That means it will pause here. You can set the image. The
image we're talking about is the avatar or
the person's image. Here you have lazy load
which we have discussed. I'm not going to go again, coming to the style section. You can change the spacing between the elements right here, if you just have one
review in one slide, then this won't make
sense to move the slider. Right here, you have spacing
between different reviews. You can change the
background color for each and every
review. What happens? Let me show you. If
I change the color, you'll see that it applies the color background settings
to the review itself. All right, here you can
add border if you want. What happens if I
add something like, let's just say 2345? Even if I add five, you
wouldn't see it because the color is very similar to what we have as the
default background color. But if I change the border color to something like
let's say black, then now you can see that the border appears
to be very fat. If we drop it down to maybe, let's just say two, this would look good. Or
maybe even three. I can add border radius if I want the testimonials
or reviews to appear in rounded edges
format and I can do it, I can add padding so that my content doesn't
stick with the border. What happens if I just
increase the padding size? This is what you'll
get. Fine, you can undo by just adding
zero to all the elements. But if you do this,
what will happen? You'll just see that
the content touches the border of your reviews. We could increase the to maybe, let's just say about 15 or so. 15 would look good here. You can set the background
color just for the header. If I set color, you'll see that the
background color will be applied to
only that part, where you have the person's
name, their position, or the profile URL, the social media icon,
and their avatar. All right, fine. If I add gap, you'll find that the gap between the content and the
header increases. Let's just undo this
so that it resets back to the default settings again for the
background color also, I'll reset this. We
have a separator. You can see right here
you have the separator. You can change the color of
the separator if you want, but we'll keep the default one. And you could even change
the size of the separator. If you want this to be
fat, you can make it fat. If you want to be narrow,
you can make it narrow. Find now this part, the John Doe and
the Emily Blunt. You'll find that the content is appearing bit down
than the header. That means there is
some gap between the header and the content
as compared to this review. Particularly because this
review has the ratings right, it has given some stars, but not for this review. If you add ratings
for all the reviews, you'll find that
the content will be adjusted
automatically, right? If we go in the text part
of the style section, you can change the typography, you can change the
color of the name, the person name, the title. The Review Review, right here is what is written
in Laura Epsom text. Then you have image. Now for the image, you can
increase or maybe decrease the size of the person here. If I make this around 70, this is how it would look. Light. Or maybe I think 40
to 50 will work just fine. Here you have gap between
the name and the photo. Here you have the border radius. If you make this border
radius to be zero, you have pointy edges
compared to rounded edges. If you want to make this as rounded edges circle or
rounded edges square shape, then you can play around with the border D
just to about fit this settings which has ten
pixels of border radius. If I go to, I can make this official or custom
if I click on custom. Now for this I can
change the color. You can see for Twitter, also the icon color
changes to red. For Instagram changes to red, Ideally Instagram
color is set to, I guess, purple or so, the purple or violet. Here you would find that
settings applied for Facebook. Also, if I reset this, you'll find that official
color is being chosen. You can increase or
decrease the size of the social icons. Right here you have the rating. Which rating do you want? Font awesome, or Unicode. What happens with Unicode? You can see that there is
different kind of stars layout. If I make this as unmarked,
as solid settings. If I make this outline, you'll find a different
setting, right? I choose fontosum and outline. There would be some
minor difference between the rating
that you will see. All right, here you have
solid and you have outline. You can play around the
sizing of these ratings. You could even add some
spacing, if you want, between each and every
individual stars. You could change the color of the stars from yellow to red, orange, anything
that you would like, you could even change the
color of the unmarked stars. Fine. Lastly, we
have navigation. Now this navigation refers to
the arrows that we have in the left and right directions and the bottom pagination
dots that we have. I could maybe play around with
the sizing of the arrows, change the color of it so
that it would be visible. You can see right here,
white is the most visible. Instead of having a
light grey color, I could play around with
different sizes of pagination. I can even change
the color of it, just the color for
the active slides. All those things
could be done right here by going to the
advanced section. You can play around with
the margin and padding, you can align the content
and so on and so forth. I hope you guys got the point about when and how to make
use of the reviews element. Of the element or pro plug in.
29. Table of Contents for your Blog Posts: Guys, this lecture is
going to be very helpful for those who are going to bill block post
on their website. As you can see right here
on my Wikipedia page. And I've searched for
web press article in Wikipedia for any of the
searches that you make, whether it be web press element or anything
that you search, you'll definitely find table of contents on the left side. That is what we are going to use in our web press website. Table of contents is one element offered by the element
or pro plug in. Which will allow
the users who visit your block post to jump
between different headings and different portions
of your block post to skip the content
that they find that is unnecessary
for their research or just for their information
collection purpose. If I just click here on Plugins, you'll find that automatically, the content jumps right to the part where I
would like to read. Here I have the topic name, or I should say subtopic, and the content itself. The way this entire
page is set up, that the title is
tres, it is set in H, One tag here you
have the content, which is ideally in
the P or span tag. Then you have the
overview divide. Overview, below which
you have a separator. Basically, this means that it's an H two tag which
defines the subtopics. Now inside the subtopics, you might have even more
subtopics like themes, plug ins and mobile
applications, accessibility and so on. These are your H three
tags. All right. This is the hierarchy
that any of block post follows, replicated the same. I've copied the
entire content from this page and created a
new block post right here. You'll find that I
have title as address. Here I have some
content. You can see that this is your title tag. This is two. You can see you can just change between different tags
if you would like to give and if you would like to give any of the words paragraph, you can just highlight
them and click on this button right here. This one is H three tag, right? I haven't added any separator between the H two
tag and the content. If you would like to give,
then you can do that. Here you have again
this as H three. If you scroll down, you'll find that other H two
tags are also there. This is the kind of post that we have and will
work around this. Let's go back to our
address dashboard. Now inside this, we are going to go under Templates
and Theme Builder. Now once we click right here, we'll go to the single
post and we'll import some of the pre made templates
for the single post design. Here you'll find a bunch
of different options. I would like to continue
with this part. I'm just going to
insert this, fine, although you can see
it is showing up some pesto sauce
recipe block post. But by default, it's not going to bring up
any default content. It is basically going to apply the style settings for
your existing block post. I hope you get the point. Let's insert them
inside our page. Here you would find the
latest block post was press, so that is what it has selected right here in this
particular container. Ideally have some
featured image for your block post that
would appear as the background image
for this container. Here you have two containers
for this flex box. Here you have the title, Some
description or I would say some post information
that when exactly was this post published? Below that, you would find
the details or excerpt. Currently, I haven't given any except for this block post, you wouldn't find
anything right here. Then you have the
content itself. You can see there are multiple
different things. 23 tags. Once you scroll down,
you'll find an option to share this and add comments
if you would like to give. Just at the bottomost
part of this block page, you'll find related block post or block post published by
the same author. Correct. These are the things that
you'll ideally find for now. I'm not going to change or maybe edit the style settings
of the title and post information and
all because that's not the purpose of
creating this lecture. I'll just quickly
add a new element and I'll search for
table of contents, which I'll just simply drag and drop it right here
in this container. Now as soon as I drop, you'll find that we have
this H two tag overview. We have these many tags. Now it is also
taking up the below, this part where this actually
is part of our block page, but it is not part of
our content, right? How can we remove them from
our table of contents? Because this is not part of
the Wordpress title content. These are the things which
are part of the content, right, from overview to history. These are the part
of our content. Inside Overview overview,
you'll have themes, plug ins, mobile applications. You can see there is
some, a hierarchy already forming up here. Let's click on the Table of
Contents Element right here in the Editing Paint
section under Content Tab, You can change the title
to something like go to content, you can change. Whatever you would like
to give this title. As here, the H tamal tag for this header
is set to H four. Now obviously, if you
change this to H three, it will be assumed that this is part of your
block post content, but it is not that case. Basically, the table of contents is helping the users to navigate between different
topics or subtopics that your block post
content actually has. All right, we'll just keep the H tamal tag for
this to be H four. Now below this, you'll
find include and exclude. Under that you'll find anchors by tags. Now, what does it mean? Here you'll find 234h6 and all the different
kinds of tags. Now, there are multiple,
multiple, multiple tags. As we discussed previously, H 2.3 tags simply showcase what this entire
subtopic is all about. Under the sub, what
are the subsections? I would say subsections
are like H three, and subtopics are H two. And the title itself
is your H one tag. Fine, coming to the H456 are generally used for those which are not
that important, but you would just like to
add styling so that it comes across like this is also
part of your block post. In my opinion, this H four tag should not be included.
We can just remove this. We can even remove Hi because it is not part
of block post contents. We'll just keep h
two and h three. You also have exclude. That means you include H two
and S three tag contents inside the table of
contents element. You exclude some of the things. Now once I go here, below this, you'll find CSS selectors in a comma separated list.
Now what does it mean? Now if you've worked around
cascading style sheets, or you have some idea about overall web development
using custom code like HTML, CSS, Javascript, then you
must have learned about CSS selectors and ID
selectors, right? There are a bunch of
different selectors. I have covered this
entire concept in my web development course. You can check out if you want. The purpose behind using CSS selectors is
that, as I said, we do not want to include
this section within our table of contents because this is not
part of our block post. We can just click on this part. We can go to Advanced
section right here. We can give CSS class to this CSS class classes
just to simplify. What does class and ID mean? One element could have a class, class could be used for
multiple elements classes. Let's just say that you are
an engineering student, all right, And you are
pursuing computer science. Now, your university has about three batches
for computer science. Computer science,
engineering students, those are three classes. When people say
computer science, then there is possibility that all three classes students can raise their
hands and say that, yeah, we are part of
computer science. But if I say particularly
that role number, let's say four raise your hand, then there would be only
one student who will raise their hand,
correct? That's ID. Id is unique. It will be only
associated to one element, to one section,
to one container. Like that, classes could be
used for multiple elements. Whenever you call that class, when you apply some
styling settings to it, the settings will be applied for all the elements which are
associated with that class. If I give one element an ID, when I call that ID in CSS and
I give some styling to it, only those style settings will be applied to that element, which will be associated
with that ID. Because ID is only
associated with one element because
each and every element will have a unique ID. Whereas it is not the
same case with classes. I hope we get the point here. We're going to add class
something like related post. Let me give this
as related post. All right, I could give
this as a camel case also, but I would just going to
keep this as related posts. Fine, I'll copy this related
post. I'll copy this. I'll go back to this part, the table of contents
and inside exclude, I'll put a dot first. Whenever you're using
your class selector, you always put dot first
whenever you're giving the name, whenever you're associating
or whenever you are first defining an element
with a class name. You do not have to put dot. But when you're
calling that class, when you want to apply some settings to
that class element, you put dot first and then
you paste class name. Now you can see that this
part is not included anymore. Fine. Although I can still see the operating system scores and the C plus mastery
block post right here. Let's also check out
what can we do about it, because these two are
different sections. Here you can see if I click
on Structure, Wait a second. Here we have related recipes. Okay, this is one section that we need to associate the class. We need to give the class
related post to this container. What I did, I just gave
the class to the heading. Which is not something
that I had to do. What I'm going to do, I'll go to Heading, this is
what I've selected. I'll scroll down in
the advanced section. If I scroll down, I
have CSS classes. I'm just going to
do command X or control X depending on the operating system
that you're using. I'll click on Related
Recipes section. I'll click on Advanced. I'll paste the class right here. I'll go back to my table of contents exclude the same thing. And this now you can see that this part
is not showing up. I hope you get the point
about excluding some of the content from your
table of contents element. All right, let's go back to include now you also
have one container. That means this control confines the table of contents to heading elements under a
specific container. What does it mean? We'll
look into this later on, but we have a marker
view as well. What does it mean?
Currently you can see all the subtopics are given
numbers under these numbers, like this two tag is Overview. Now inside overview, we have sub bullet points
1.11 2131 point 4.1 If I had some
other subsections for the second the
second subtopic also it would have
been 2.12 0.22 point 3.1 I can make use of numbers or bullet points
if I have bullet points. This is what I'll see. Now I can change the
icon if I want or if I would like to make
use of no icons. I can just click on none. If I want to change the icon, I can just click on the icon and it will show up
the icon library. I can just search for arrows. Okay, let's just
search for arrows, or I could just go on all icons and I could
search for a bullet. Okay, bullet is not
something that we have, let's search for forward. What basically I'm
looking for is these two triangle icons, or what can you say these are called as your triangular
brackets, right? We are looking for
triangular brackets. What are the recommended
bullet points? You can see a circle
with a outline, an outline circle with
a dot or square dot, right or square bullet
point, I should say. If you scroll in
different icons, you'll find many
different options. I'm going to search for angle, this is exactly what
I was looking for. Let me just make
use of this here. You'll find that
this kind of icon is applied to the entire
table of contents list. Fine. If I go to the additional
options, what can we see? Do you want to add wordrapow? None of my two or three tags have a really long text, right? Even if I try to add something, let me try to do it. But I don't think I
would be able to, because here we do not have
option to edit the text. We have option to play around the styling and
advanced section of it. But if I would like to
change the content, I'll have to go back to my
theme Customize press editor. What essentially word wrap
basically mean is that if your subtopic
name is really long, the character limit or the
word limit is very large. Ideally, it will adjust itself that the entire text length will appear in two
or three lines. But if you toggle the word wrap, then it will mean it will
just take up the entire line. And then the words
which will be cut out, they will be given
with ellipsis. That is what wrap
basically mean. You have minimized box
option, What does it say? Basically, if you
have toggled this on, you can collapse
and you can expand. This is the feature that you can get with
minimized box option. Now you can even change the icon for this collapse
and expand option. You can choose between
different icons by clicking on the icon library. Or if you would like to
upload your own custom SG. You can do it for expand, you can choose between
different icons. But for now I'll just keep
what it is showing up here. It will also show that this
minimized version should be visible on tablet portrait. So what does it mean if
I have desktop mode? I can see this
collapse and expand. If I go to tablet screen,
I'll again see this. But if I go to mobile device, I'll also see this part. Let's see what happens if
I have desktop or smaller. That means this part will be already closed If I'm
on my mobile device. If I'm on my tablet
also, it will be closed. But if I go back to
my desktop mode, it will be opened up. That's what basically
this minimized on is. All right, I hope you
get the point here. I'll just send it
back to the default, which is tablet portrait. Now here I have the
hierarchical view. What does it mean? Very simple. Under overview, we have themes, plug ins and mobile
applications, right? These are part of
this overview topic. If I toggle this off,
it will appear that they are separate sections,
they are not part of it. I'll have to click this so that people can
understand that. Okay, in mobile applications are part of the
overview section. You also have collapse of items. If I do this, I can
click on this overview. And when someone
clicks on overview, they will be given
options to choose, themes, plug ins, and so on. Also, keep this part fine, coming to the style part. Okay, what else do
we have for content? First, let me make
sure that we are not. Not skipping any of the things. If I go in the exclude, again, you have the same thing marker and the icon that you
would like to give. If I go to the style
part, what I can do, I can change the box
background color or add border color
to the entire box. I can add the loader color. What happens if I
add loader color? That means whenever you expand, let's say you have a bunch
of different subsections, The block post is really long and there are multiple
table of contents right here in this element
itself over there, it might take some time
to load the contents. Over there you can add a color
if you would like to give. I can add a border it, I
can add border radius. But let's try and do it. Try and do it only
then we'll come to know whether it even
looks good or not. For now, I'll add border color. Okay. This is background color. We want a lighter
background color. I'll keep this as something
like a dark gray shade. I think this would look good. Fine. We'll also change the color of the
text. Done very here. I can add border color to something like, let's say black. All right. I have lodo color. Let's give this to something
like bright yellow. Or I'm going to select
a bright yellow color. Fine. I'll copy the text code. Fine, I can add border with. If I add border with, you can see that border around my entire table of contents increases and
it becomes fatter. I can add border radius to
make the edges rounded. All right, I think about
25 pixels looks good. In this case, I can add
padding around the content. I can adjust the height of it. I can give box shadow I want, but I'm not going to
give any box shadows. I'll reset it back. We can style of a
header as well. Let's try to give the same
yellow color to this heading. Fine, I can change around this to something like this color. I think this would look good. Fine. Now for the text
color, what I'll do, I'll select white as my text, but it is not
appearing that nice. We'll have to drop down our
yellow color to bit darker. Only then it would be visible. And it makes sense right here. I can just play around to the part where I
get the exact color that would go well with this. All right. So I think this
color looks good, fine. Now, for the typography, I can set this to poppins. I can just search for poppins. I can even change the
font size if I want, but I'm just going
to keep it as it is. I can change the icon color here for each and every
icon color that we have. We can change this to white, This icon that we have
for collapse and expand. We can change this to white. Also, we can add
separator width. That means how fat we
want our separator to be. I'm just going to keep
this as three pixels. Now, coming to the list
part and a style section, you'll find that we'll work
around these things here. You can adjust the height, that typography, we can
set this to poppins. Here, you can change
the color of the text. You can add indentation. Indentation is the space
between this part. You'll find this right here. Whenever you are adding some topics which are
part of one big topic, you definitely leave
some space at the start. That's called a indentation. You can adjust the indentation, you'll find that the
unit is set to EM, you can change this
to pixels that it would be better to understand,
right? You can adjust it. If you bring this to zero, then it's obviously as if you are not including
this kind of a thing, which is called a
hierarchical view, right? You can just go back, increase indentation or maybe even set this to default fine. But for now I would
just like to keep this as 15 pixels because
that looks good to me. Now for the text color, I'll change this to white
so that it is visible. I can even add underline
for each and every one. If I want, I can change
the hover effect. If I hover around any of these, I can change the hover color. I can change the active. That means whenever that
particular element is active, I can change its
color to yellow. Whatever is set to this part, we can change it to
that. Let's do that. For this, I'll click on Header. I'll copy the hex code. I'll go to List
here inside Hover. Also, I'll use the
same color for active. Also I'll use the same color. Here we have selected overview. That means currently
overview is set. We are viewing the overview. If I hover around
any of the other, you'll find that underline also appears and the color of
the font also changes. Correct. Here you have
marker, what does it mean? Let's try to find that out. Marker is basically the color of your bullet point
icons. Correct. We can even set this to white. All right, And you can
change the sizing of it. You can make this
appear a little bit large so that it is visible. 12 pixels would be
sufficient, in my opinion. All right, coming to
the advanced section, you can align the items
and you can make this. Sticky also. Now, how making
this sticky would help us. Let's see. First,
I'll publish this. And as soon as I
click on Publish, you'll see that it
prompts us that, would you like to
give some condition? If I click on Ad, you can see
I can include the table of contents for all my
singular pages and post. But do I want to apply
the same settings for my home page that we built
using the element or pro? No, I just want to showcase this particular table of contents element
for our block post. I'll just select block post. Now I can even add
some other category that do I want to apply the settings for all
the block post or if you select block
post, I can do it. If I would like to exclude
inside all the blockposts, I just want to exclude
from one block post. But I would like to
apply the table of contents element for all
the other block post. Let's say I have 100 block posts out of which I would like to use this table of
contents element in 99 of those block posts. But only one of that blockpost should not
have the table of content. What would you do? Would
you just go on and keep on typing the
title of 99 block post? No, you can just make use of
this all instead of include, you can add a condition
and make this exclude. Now in the exclude,
you can go to post and search for that
particular block post. I can search for
blog, let's say one. I do not want to include
this part in log one. All right. I can add
other conditions also, but for now I'll just
keep it as it is. When cyclicon save, we
can preview the changes. Cyclicon preview changes. Once I scroll down, you'll find that our
table of contents is in its fixed position, right? It is in its fixed
position here. If I want this table of
contents to be sticky, which basically means that
even if I scroll down, my Table of Contents should
move along with my cursor. That means it should
stick to its part. And doesn't matter if I
scroll down or scroll up, it should be with me,
like how it is there. Right here you can see
the left pane itself. The left pane entirely
is dedicated for this. No matter how much
I scroll down, the table of contents
element will be here instead of what
we can see right here, which is at its fixed position. What changes we need to make? First of all, we'll need
to adjust the width of this such that even if
I make this as sticky, it doesn't overlap
with our content. Otherwise, content
wouldn't be visible. Correct. Over here, what
are we going to do? We'll just select on this. We'll change the width of this
to fit to about this part. Fine, publish this. After doing so, we'll click on this element
table of contents. We'll go to Advanced Section. In the Advanced section, we'll have to scroll
down to the part of Motion Effects right here. Under Motion Effects,
you would find sticky. You want to make
this as sticky at the top or at the bottom where exactly it should be sticky for all the devices
or just for the desktop. Obviously, we just
want it for desktop. Otherwise, the width of the
tablet and mobile is not sufficient to fit
the content and the Table of contents element. We're just going to cross out tablet device and we'll
just keep this for desktop. If I scroll down,
you'll find that the table of contents
stick right here. All right, this is the thing
that you can do right here. Now you can adjust
the width also such that it can take up
this much space. Because you know that
table of contents is only occupying this
much space, right? I can expand the width, fine. Here is what you will
get. Let's publish this. Let's see if we can see
the reflected changes. Now you can see, currently I'm on my plug ins.
Plug ins is highlighted. If I scroll down to
mobile applications, you'll see mobile
applications, other features, accessibility, all the things will be highlighted. All right. I can even expand and collapse. This part is also collapsing. If we go to the next one, I can just directly
click and it will scroll down to that particular
part and so on. If I view some other block
post like block one, then we wouldn't find this
kind of table of contents. You can see there is
no table of contents. What if I go to some
other block post? Let's say I'm on my
Fema block post? Let's see if we can see
the table of contents. Here we can see the
table of contents. Now the only reason why we cannot find any headings because the body of our block post doesn't have any H2h3
tanks and so on. Correct. That's the
reason why you do not get to see any table
of contents over here. You can work around
your, um, as I said, this part, the right
section container will have your featured
image as the background. You can just remove them by just clicking on the flex box
right here, the container. By going to the style section, you'll find the featured image. You can remove them
if you publish this. Now the default settings of this template has
been changed now. Even if I view the
Figma block post, you wouldn't find a
featured image in the background of the
stable of content element.
30. Lottie - Make your Website Look Professional & Over the Top!: All right. Now I'm not quite
sure if you've ever heard of the Lottie element
while building your website using the
element or plug in. But Lottie essentially is an open source
animation file format which is based on the
Javascript Object Notation. Json is something
similar to Javascript, but it is a simplified
version of it. Because of this, they
have a really small size, they are faster to load than traditional animation file
types like GIFs and all those. Now Lottie has also one more advantage
as compared to GIF, which is that they can
be interactive website, you make your website very
appealing to the users. You can make it
very interactive. And it's going to scale up your website design
skills to the next level. That's why we will
learn about it. Now, right here, you'll see that I'm on my
Contactors page. Right here in the
Contactors page. I would like to add
a hero section for this page by just
choosing the flex box. I'll select the two
container layout. In the left side I
will add the text. And on the right side I will
add one Lottie animation. First, let me just
add Lottie right here once I drag and
drop it. Right here. By the way, this
is a pro element. All right, so this is a default animation that you can see right here in
the content tab. You'll find Lottie and Settings. In Lottie you'll
find that either you can use your media
file or external URL. Now what does it mean? And where exactly could you get
these Lottie files? First, let's see how we can
upload our media file here in Lottie Files.com This
is not an open source, but I would say it's
a marketplace where you can buy or download Lottie animations for
completely free of cost, depending on which kind of
animation and plan you are on. Right now I'm using
the free version and I've just searched for play. Now there are a bunch
of different animations going around and these
are completely free, although you might find
pro at the bottom. But these are just free to use. If you find any of
them which are paid, they will have a circle, yellow in color with a
crown icon inside it. I would say that's
the pay animation. But right now,
let's say I want to make use of this particular
animation, right? So I can just click
over here and you can change between
different colors that you have. You can Erit animation. You can erit the
background color. But we just want transparent
background so that it's easy for us to embed in any of the
section inside our website. So I can just click
on Edit Animation. And I can open this in Creator, or I can open this
in Lote Editor. So let me just open
this in Lottie editor. And once I do this, it might
take some time to load up. And here I can change the colors by just
clicking all colors, you'll find that it's working around the shades
of orange, right? If I change the color by
just clicking right here, I can choose green
or any other color. Whichever I am comfortable
working around with, I can just select this
green color and it will form the different
kinds of green colors. You can see towards the
end of the animation, the green color is at a
much transparent state. Whereas when it starts off with the pulse effect,
it is very dark. This is what you have. You also have the icon inside
the play button. Now, this image, I'm not quite sure if you can edit this image because this is, it's not an animation here. You could replace the
image with whatever you like or you could just
download with what you have. I'm just going to
save this animation. Once I do this, I'll get an option to save
it in my workspace, and I can give any
name I would like. Fine, so I'm just going to save this in my first project folder. Now this is the default folder that you will get along
with your account. Now as soon as you click and you save it in your workspace, you'll get an option
to download and export this in a
Lottie Json format. This is what we want, although there are
other options as well, like optimized Lottie, Jason, optimized Lott and many other
formats like GIF, Webp, Four MOV, the other four
formats which you can see right here at the bottom
right corner of your screen. Now these are not
interactive elements. Now, right here as you can see, I have different animations. Now these animations have
some name going around. You cannot just preview
them like this. Like how you could preview images or videos
and other things. Here you'll have to embed them or while you are exporting, you have to give a name to
your animation so that it's easy for you to import them in whichever
section you like. For now what I'm going to do is I'll just select this part. And I will click
on Select to see whether the correct animation
has been pulled out. Yeah, you can see Contact us, animation is pulled out fine. Now, initially you saw
that the animation did. For once, right? It
is not going around. In loop, you can even
adjust the alignment. First of all, you can either
make it central line left, a line right Aline, But even
if I changed the alignment, you wouldn't find
any necessary change simply because it takes up the entire height and width with respect to the
Flexbox dimensions. Right, We have two columns. This Flexbox container
will have our title for the contact page and this
will have the animation. All right, here you can
add caption if you want. You can add a caption
custom as title. Then whatever title is there for the animation will
display right here. If I can just put caption, then I will have to
give caption to this. Fine, if I make this custom, I'll have to enter the custom
caption to this animation. But for now let's just keep it. None below. You'll find in now link, you can either add
a custom ural, that means whenever
someone clicks on this animation Lottie animation, they will be redirected
to any web page. Fine, now we have covered
the part of Lottie. Let's see what we can
do with settings. Now settings part, you have different options like trigger
in different viewport. First of all, I'll just also add one more flex box just to show that does the alignment
even work or not. Here I have this
vertical dimension. I'm going to add another Lottie
element right of the bat. I'm just going to load, I'm just going to upload the latest animation which
was the play button. All right now. Okay? Okay. I'm not quite sure why the image isn't popping out
the play button. Like how we saw right here. What? We'll just replace this
with some other animation. Let's see what we can get here. I think this looks good, but this animation
size is way too large. But still, if we can try
and align this left. Yeah, you can see it
does align to the left. It does align to the right, and it does align to the center. You have different
options to align your animation by going
to the setting spart. What can you see? You can
see the viewpoort settings. That means trigger
this animation whenever you are in that
particular viewport. Now what does viewpoort mean? Here you can see a viewport is a polygon viewing region
in computer graphics. In computer graphics theory,
there are two regions, like notions of relevance when rendering some
objects to an image. Not necessarily
complicated explanation, but what essentially
basically means that the display size is depending on what kind
of device you're using. Let's just say we are on
the testtop screen and I'm particularly using
the Macbook Air M, one the dimensions
of my monitor, my laptop screen, in terms of width and
height, whatever it is, it will take up the entire
width and the animation will start whenever I'm viewing
this on my Viewpoort screen. Now the viewport just
below the trigger point, you'll find that the viewport, it's set from 0% 200% That
means if I scroll my screen, it doesn't matter, my
animation will go on. My animation will be 0-100%
But what if I add that? Viewpoort animation
should run from 50% to 65% Let's say
for this part here, you can see in the rightmost
part of our web page, any of the website,
wherever you go, or even in your folders where you have multiple file items, you'll always find the scroll
bar right here, correct. Now, the scroll bar
is allowing you to actually scroll and
view your entire viewport, right? Your entire viewport. So if I customize this lottie animation such that the viewport
should start from somewhere about 50%
and the animation should end at 65% Now
if I scroll down, you'll find that I've
covered about this part, but still the scroll
bar isn't covering the 50% of the entire viewport. If I scroll down again, you can see that about 49% of the screen has been
covered right here. You can see right here, that's
why animation has started. If I scroll down
again, you know what? I'll just keep this in loop so that the animation
will keep on running. Now, once I go past the
65% of my viewport, the animation wouldn't run. You'll find that the
animation has been stopped. If I scroll up again, you'll find that the
animation is running again. That's what basically in
this viewport actually mean. But the best practice is
to keep on running it. Or if you would like to just the animation at a particular viewport
scroll, then you can do it. The other triggers that
we have are click, whenever I click on the element, only then the
animation will start, correct. That is, click. And how many times do you want to run this animation
right here? Loop is going to go in infinite. If I just change this to three, then it will animate
three times in loop. After that it will stop. This is the second
time it is running. Let's wait till it
runs the third time. After the third time, you'll find that the
animation won't run. This is the third time
that it is running. Let's see if it runs
the next time or not. Here, you'll find
that the animation stops after running
it three times. Right here, you can
even change it. If you just leave it as blank, it will keep on
running infinitely. Followed by you have
other triggers on hover. Whenever you move your cursor
inside the Lote element, then the animation will start. And once you hover out of the element still the
animation will go on. You have just triggered the
starting point, correct? It will start when you move your cursor
inside the element. Here you have on hover out. Whenever you click on
On as the trigger. You also have on hover out. That means what if you move your cursor outside
the lote element. Then in that case you can either reverse the animation
or you could pause it when I
started the animation. First, let me just start the animation by moving my cursor. Now if I move my cursor out, you can see animation
has been paused. What if I do reverse? I'll bring my cursor in. Now if I move my cursor out, you can see the animation
is being reversed. This is how it follows. The other triggers that
we have are scroll. Now what happens with scroll? First I'll just add one more flex box layout
with downward direction. I'll add one more lot
element for this one. This one which we saw.
I'll go to settings. We don't want scroll for this, we'll just keep on over fine, reverse is what we
want. All right. Now for the other section, the other flex box that we have. I'll add lottie element. Just drag and drop
it right here. I'll upload a media file. Continue. I have
a wheel animation also. Let's try to bring that. I think this might be the one. Let's see. Yeah, this
is the Wheel one, but I'm not quite sure why
the image isn't showing up. I'll have to go back to my
dashboard of Lottie files. And once I go here, I'll need to check this animation right
here. I have this. I'm going to change the title of this to something like Wheel so that it is easy to
understand and reuse it. Okay, here we are. Seeing that there's
some dot right here. I'm not quite sure if the
image would be exported. Let's try and download this
again. I'm going to go back. I'll upload a new file and I can just take this box that do
not show this message again. Fine. I'll just select Wheel. Okay, the animation
is not showing up. Not quite sure.
Let's try to find out some other animation. I've just selected
wheel initially, we had this incorrect. Let's try and find out what
happens with this animation. All right, if we make use of this particular animation or
maybe even this animation. All right, what happens then? Let's see. I'll
just click on this. I'll click on Save two
Work space Up, save it. And it will open a new tab. Now in the new tab, change the name of the animation to
something like wheel two. All right, and we'll
download the Json file. Let's download this. I'm going
to upload a new Json file. Hopefully this should work. Yeah, here you can see that the wheel animation is
showing up properly. The viewport setting
to be scroll. I want the animation
to last forever. That means it should
be infinite In look more whenever
you trigger scroll. What happens if you scroll up? You can see that the wheel
will turn anti clockwise. If I scroll down, we spins
in clockwise direction. That's what basically it means. Now if you change the
viewport settings to, let's just say that you start at about 65 to 70% and you end at 100% Then
even if you go down, if you scroll down till
the part you don't cover about 67% of the viewport, you won't find the animation
of the wheel spinning. If you scroll past the
67% of your viewport, only then the animation
will trigger fine. But let's just keep zero to 100% Now here you have
effects relative to viewport, or you want it with respect
to the entire page. This is with respect to the entire page and
not your viewpoint. That means viewpoint could be how many elements you add right from this part
to the end part. But the page will be only
from where your header ends and from where your footer
starts, that's your page. All right, here, if I scroll down further where
I can see my footer, then the animation
wouldn't work. That's The entire page thing. Let's bring it back to Viewport. Now you also have start point and endpoint Now,
what does it mean? I have also a few
other animations using which you'll understand
this in a much better way. I'll add another Lottie element. Okay, let me just
search for Lottie here. I will upload the first
animation which I had used. Is it this one? This one. Let's try and replace
with this one. Okay, this is the wheel one,
This is the contact one. Let's see this. Nope,
not this as well. I had a car animation also. Let me see whether we
could use that or not. I'm just going to
type in car or I could type in motorcycle,
cycle, anything. The only reason why
I'm looking for car or any moving
object is that I can show that how
exactly this part works, the standpoint and the endpoint. All right, here I have this particular animation
which I can make use of. I'll go to download,
Save to work space. Yes, select this
project as my folder. If you would like to
add another folder, you will find that it is only available in
the pro version. Okay, why did it not
open up a new workspace? Let's say it again. Ideally it should open
up a new tape from where we can download as a Json file. Fine. Also, it could be
possible that we have used up all the free credits
that were allocated to us in the free version. I'm not sure. I'll
have to find out. Just give me a moment and
I'll get back to you guys. Okay, here I am in my dashboard. I can just rename this to. Once it's done, let's download this and I'm
going to upload it. I'll select this lot media
file and I'll change this. Let's try and use this. Okay. Still I think there
might be some problem with Lottie itself because
it's not loading up the image. But here you can find
the small square box. Are the wheels. The bigger box right here
where my cursor is hovering, it's the car itself, and in the background
you have the scenery. All right, now I can
make the start point, let's say 50, and I
can make this as 100. Now what happens? You'll see that this black bear
appears right here. So it starts after the 50%
of the animation right here. If I click on this
animation here, you have the big tower
going around, right? So that's the 50% of the
animation length right here. You would find that in
the background you have big skyscraper right
from there itself, the animation will start
and it will end at 100% You could even drop it down that the
endpoint should be at 80% of the animation length. So these are the things that you can work around right now. It might not make sense
to you all since we just cannot see all the scenery And the object
that we have here, you can play around the
speed of your animation, whether you want it
to be running in one x or 1.5 or two x speed, that will just speed
up the animation. Here you have two X and
you can see how fast the animation animation rules. If I make this as 1.5 it will
run something like this. But let's just keep it as one. You could even drop it down so that the animation
is a bit slower. What else do we have?
We can reverse this. Now, what does we have
seen exactly right here. Whenever we hover our cursor
out of the animation, the animation will be reverse. Something similar can be done. Here you have rendering option whether you want it
to be G or canvas. If I change this to canvas, then let's see what happens. Now, Canvas is not particularly
a good option to do, because Wig is the one which will contain all
your necessary files, your images, and all the
different kinds of things. It will also require less loading time
compared to canvas. Fine, here you have
Leasyload option. We will unselect this
coming back to this part, now inside style, you
can play around with the width and set the
maximum width for your lot. Here you can change
whether you would like to give some
transparency to this or not. If I add something like 0.19 then you'll find that the animation
is very transparent. It is not very opaque. The more you move your
slider towards right, the more your animation
would be visible here. You can even add CSS filters, just like how you could
do with an image. All right here, I can just undo this so that everything
is visible here. You can even add hover effect and you can change
the transition duration. In the advanced section, you
can play around the margin, padding settings and many
different kinds of things.
31. Code Highlight: All right, now as you can see, I'm here on my blog post page. Let's just say that for some reason you are
building a blog related to coding and you would like to add code snippets
in your blog post. In that case just to give an example like how in
Javat point website you can find that all
these codes are in a snippet format and they
have the syntax highlighted. Something similar
could be achieved in our we press block post as well. By just going back
to our website, I'll click on a new flex box. I'll choose this direction here. I will add a new element
called as Code highlight. Let me just drag and
rop it right here. Now, once I do this, you can select between
different languages. Right here, the code which I have just to compare
two strings, okay, this is in Java format. This is also in Java. What I can do, I can
just copy this code. I can go back here,
instead of Java script, I can select Java. I paste the code. Once I paste this, you'll find
that all these lines have, you know, highlight highlighted
in different colors. You can find the class
appears in blue. Public static void
appears in blue. The value that we provide to the variables S one and
S two are in green. Then the main syntax, the string data values and the print LN functions
are also in red. The comments are in gray format. This is the syntax
that you have, right? And this is the kind
of highlight that it already pastes, right? The highlight that
it already applies. Now here you'll find
a toggle to switch between showing the
line numbers or not. So if I toggle this off, you wouldn't find any
line numbers like how you cannot find
any line numbers. Correct. But if
you'd like to add, you can add it here. You have copy to clipboard. That means, let's just say, here I am here, Can I find an option to copy
to the clipboard? Unlike geeks, for geeks, let me just go back. Instead of Java t point, let me just search for GFT, which geeks for geeks, I have the Javascript
code right here. Now here you'll find a button to copy this
to our clipboard. If I copy, you can see
code has been copied, but it was not the same case in Java T Point here,
you can add this. If I bring my cursor inside
this particular code snippet, I can find the option
to copy the code. All right, now let's also make a duplicate of this
instead of Java. I will make this as Javascript. The highlight would
be a bit different. Let me also copy the
code for Javascript. I'll copy and I'll paste
the code for Javascript. That way you'll find some
different syntax correct. Now, for this part where you have the copy to clipboard, you
have line numbers. You'll also highlight
some particular lines. You have 13 hyphen six.
Now what does it mean? That means these lines,
line number one, line number 3456, they
will be highlighted. All right, Let me change this to something else and it's
just a placeholder. It is not some default value. If I add something like one, the first line would
be highlighted. If I want line number
three to be highlighted, I can just add and I can
give line number three. If I want line
number six to show, I can put coma and
line number six. But qualify, I want
line numbers 456, all three of them
to be highlighted. I can just make four hyphen six from line four to
six will be highlighted. All right. I can do the
same, something like 325. That means these three lines are where we are creating variables and adding
some value to this. All right, so we have
highlighted the lines here, you'll find an option
to add word wrap. Now, what does word wrap mean? Here you can find
that the code has, what do you say, comment, which is taking up the entire width. And we have a scroll bar,
horizontal scroll bar. We have to scroll this to
find the entire thing. If I toggle this word wrap, you'll find that
what do you say? Comment appears in a way that we do not need
scroll bar anymore. This is what wrap
actually means. You can disable this so that you'll get your scroll bar here. You can select between
different themes that you have. Currently it is set
to solid theme. If we change it to dark theme, you'll have brown
background color and here you'll
have text in white. If we choose this, Okada, this is what you'll see. We have solarized light. Tomorrow we have twilight. Now, tomorrow is something similar to what we can see right here in Geeks Ja script
code snippet here. You can adjust the height,
can adjust the font size. If I drop down my height to
something around 115 pixels, you'll also find
vertical scroll bar. You'll have to place
your mouse cursor inside the code snippet and
then you'll have to use your scroll wheel to
scroll the code fine. I can undo this so that it takes a sufficient
height here, you can increase or
decrease the font size. Going to the style tab, you do not have style,
you have advanced. Now, advanced
obviously is going to show the same things which we can see for all
the other elements.
32. Paypal & Stripe Integration - Collect Payments Easily!: Guys, now we're going
to learn how we can accept payments using the
Paypal and Stripe button. Now these two buttons, let me just search
this and show you all. Here we have two buttons,
Paypal and Stripe. These two buttons allows us as the website owners,
to collect payments, whether it is to just
collect donations or to set up your payment gateway for selling your
products or services. Or it could be offering
a subscription without having the need to understand
and use Vo Commerce. Right here I'm on my block page. And I'll add a new section and a new flex box will be in
vertical direction, right? Let's add the Paypal button. First here, I'll just
drag and drop it down. Now under content, you'll find first the
pricing and payments. Under this, you'll
find Paypal account. You just enter your
Paypal account, whether it is your personal
or business Paypal. You'll just enter the e mail using which you use your Paypal. Obviously, if you're
a Paypal user, you must know that account
e mail should be here. In the transaction type, you have a bunch of
different options like checkout,
donation, subscription. Let's first see about checkout. Let's say I'm trying
to sell an ebook. I can just call the
item name to be book. Then I have SKU, which stands for
Stock Keeping Unit, Which basically means that, let's just say you're selling a physical product
in your inventory, you have about 50 items. If you put 50 over here, that means the maximum selling that can happen is for 50 times. All right, if you're
selling a digital product and you want to sell this for just a
limited number of users, then too, you can set this as SKU and you can give
the number fine. You can set the price. It's up to you, whatever
you want to keep. Let's just say I'm keeping
$20 and this is in USD. You can change the currency
to Australian dollar, Euros and so on. You can change the quantity. Now this quantity is basically whenever someone clicks
on the Paypal button. How many items
should be added in their card or when
they purchase? Do you want the users to buy two or three items whenever they click on the buy button or
is it just one quantity? We'll just keep this as one. And then you have
a shipping price. You can add this. Let's say
I'm adding $5 of shipping. I am adding tax
of about 5% 5% of $20 would be $1.01 plus five
which is the shipping price, will be $6 Now that
$6 would be added to the selling price of
item that is 2020, plus six would be
$26 at the checkout. All right, here in
the button part, you would find that you
can change the text. Let's say instead of
buy, now you would like to keep something like purchase. All right, then you can set
the alignment for the button. Here it is left a line. I can change this to center, or I could write a line, or I can justify it
such that it will take up the entire width. Fine. Here I can change the logo or icon of Paypal to
something else by just clicking on it and ensuring
that we upload our own. Or we can choose the ones
which Fontawesome offers. But right now I'll
just keep it as it is. I can click on this
to remove the icon, or I could upload my own. Here in icon position, I can see that the papal icon
appears before the text. If I change this to after text, see this papal icon
appears after the text. Let's just keep back
to before text. And then you have icon spacing. If you move the slider,
you'll see that there is some gap between your
icon and your text. Fine, here you have
button ID using which you can track how many
units are sold and so on. Then you have
additional options. Now this is important, important in the sense
that let's say once a user completes
the payment process and that transaction
was successful, where do you want to
redirect the user to? You can add a thank you page in your website or a dynamic page where you can add a
dynamic tag using which they will be shown an
invoice for their purchase. You can add that right now. I'll just use cite URL,
which is the home page. Here you'll find that. Open
the Paypal in new tab. Whenever someone clicks on it, the Paypal will open
in a new account. Here you have sandbox also, which we'll see
in just a moment. But let me just cover what does custom messages mean,
if I toggle this. Let's just say there
is some error. You'll see an error occurred. But if the Paypal account is not connected from the seller point of view, it will be displayed. No payment method
connected, contact seller. Now here we have sandbox. What does it mean if
I switch this on? You'll find sandbox
e mail account. And it says that this is the address given
to you by Paypal. When you set up a sandbox
with your developer account, you can use the sandbox to
test your purchase flow. Sandbox is just a word to explain that
you're working on a test environment
in Paypal itself. When you log in, you
have an option to go to developer.paypal.com
Once you log in, you can go to testing tools
under Sandbox accounts. You will get default
two accounts here. I have these three. If I want to create
a new account, I'll just click on
this button and you'll find that I can create a personal account or
a business account. And I can choose the region. If I put this as United
States of America, I can just accept the
payments in US dollars. Right once I create the account, you can see right here, business account
would be created. You can just click on
the account right here, the link which is there. And you need to copy the
e mail and come back to your part and paste the sandbox e mail account
in this placeholder. Fine. Now since we are using a zip
file of the element or pro, and we are not actually relying on an element or subscription, this sandbox wouldn't work. What I would do,
I will just enter my own personal Paypal account to see if the payment
works or not. Just give me a moment till
I enter my Paypal details. Now I'm going to publish. Once I publish, I'll just
preview the changes. Now if I scroll down and if I click on the
purchase button, you'll find that we will be
redirected to a new tab where we saw that there was some
payment gateway going around. But we are locked out of
the system, log out again. And I'll show you all
how it works here. As you can see in the card, we are supposed to pay $26 $20 is for the item
selling price. $5 is for the shipping and
$1 for tax total is 26. Right. Let's just
cancel this out. You can use your sandbox. Coming to the style section, you can change the typography. You can change the text shadow. You can add some background
colors if you want. You can add border radius. You could even add
some other messages. The messages that you have, the error message and the
Paypal not connected. You can change the color of
it and typography also fine. Something similar can be done for the stripe
button as well. I'll just search
for stripe button, I'll just place it below this, and here you would find
the product name again, I'll just go back
to my Paypal button to show that other
transaction types. Here we have check out. First, we looked into the
checkout transaction type, which means you're selling at a service for the one time
fee. Then you have donation. Now once you click on
donation, what happens? You can choose the
item name here. It would be donation, obviously. Now since this is donation, you're not selling anything. You are just accepting
payments and there is not any stock left
in your inventory. You can just give SQ
something like N one, just two, just to
associate donation. With this, then you
have donation amount. Whether you want to
collect fixed amounts of donation or you want
it to be any amount. Whether you want it
to be flexible for users to pay anything
that they can. This is what you can select, then you have a subscription. Once you click on it, you
can choose the item name. Let's say basic tier, right? We looked into the three tiers of pricing in the pricing table. Lecture right here. You can just give the
name to your service. You can set the SQ
to something like basic tier. And you
can set the price. Also, let's say 50 bucks is what they will pay
on a monthly basis. Or you could set it
daily, weekly, or yearly. And there is auto renewal
function as well. When someone clicks and purchases and they enter
their Paypal details, they will be charged
on a monthly, daily, or weekly basis. If you want this to
be auto renewal off, then I don't think
there is any point of making this a subscription. The only difference would be
that once you make this a subscription and you don't
have auto renewal feature, it basically means that you will be stopping the access to the service that your user will have access to so that they will have
to make the payment. Again, if you make this as auto renewal
basically means that the user doesn't have to enter the Paypal details over
and over again. Fine. These are few things in your Paypal button coming
to this stripe button, if you go here, you can
set the product name. Let's give this something
like book again, book. I can set the currency to other. Here I have a bunch
of different options. Earlier we did not see INR which is Indian
rupees for Paypal, but now for Stripe we
do have this option. Then you have product price. You can set it something again, $20 You can set the quantity. You can set the shipping price. The tax rate. But for tax
rate you'll have to first connect your stripe
account and inside the stripe account you'll
have access to products. For that particular product, you need to set the
tax rates. All right. I'll show you how we can
make use of the sandbox or I should say testing
API of stripe. This will work with
this particular file of our Elementor Pro
without having the need to subscribe for the
elementor Pro subscription. Coming to the button part here, you can change the button
to something like, let's say purchase. I can set the alignment again, left, right, center, justified. Okay, I can just make the center align.
I can change the icon. I can set if I want the icon to display or before the text, I can choose the
icon spacing here. In the additional options, I can choose the redirection
after successful payment. Here I can set the URL. Here we have open Stripe in
a new tab, custom messages. Here you have set up
stripe test environment. If I toggle this,
you'll see that first we'll have to go
to integration settings. If I hover around this, you'll see it will open a new link in our Wordpress dashboard right here under
Wordpress Dashboard, you'll find that we are
under Element or Settings. Under Settings, we have
selected integrations. Now once you've
selected integrations, just scroll down to the
part where you find Stripe and under
test secret key, you need to paste your API key. So I'll just go back to
my Stripe dashboard. You need to first
create an account. It doesn't take a lot of
time to create your account. You don't have to enter a bunch of your personal
details and wait for authorize and
start your account. You can just get
started with it and you just need to go to your
dashboard settings. Once you go there, you'll
find API key stab. Just click over there and
reveal your test key. And copy and paste it right here under this test secret key. Once you do that, just
click on valid test API. Here you can just publish this. Now once you publish
this, what will happen? Let's see if I
click on block two. Once I scroll down,
I can click on this stripe checkout
and you can see $20 of book is what we can see. This is under test mode, fine. Here you can enter your E mail card details card
holder and so on. Fine, we'll just
go back and yeah, basically this was about
your stripe purchase. The only difference is in stripe and Paypal is that
Paypal allows you to select other
options as well like donation subscription
or one time purchase. But for Stripe you can
just sell one product. If you want to sell I think membership
or anything like that. You'll have to
change the settings inside your stripe
account itself. Because right here as you can see under your
pricing and payments, you'll have to first set up your products and then select
the tax rates and so on. Currently, Element
or Pro doesn't allow you as the
website designer and developer to add
the functionality of donation and subscription
for the stripe buttons, But you can do so
for the Paypal.
33. Hotspot - Have you heard about this before?: All right, now let me
show you one cool feature which is called as hotspot.
So what does it mean? So let's say that
I have an image, preferably of a
map or a product. And for that, let's
say on a map you have multiple locations and
you're just trying to display that where your offices or your shops are located. Right? So you can
add hotspots so that whenever someone clicks on that hot spot or
hover around it, then they would find
the address of it. Let me just show you
an example of it. I can just choose one image. I have this really cool photo of gaming PC set up right here. I can add few hot spots upon. However, we can see whether this product
is a gaming chair. This is a gaming mouse. We have pillows,
we have keyboard. We have a computer that is
four at the very bottom, or poster of it, I can see. Then you have external monitors, You have controller at the back. You have the Funko Pops and the soundproof foams
in the background. Right. You can add hotspot here and the content
you would find image, you can choose the
size of the image. You can set the alignment left, right, center, and so on. But for now it's just taking up the entire size of the
container under hot spot. You could add one hot
spot or multiple ones. I can just add
multiple hotspots. But you wouldn't be
able to see right now. Why? Because I
think the color and the way it is fixed
is not visible to us. We'll also look into
how we can do it. Currently, I've
added two hot spots, which is not sufficient for us. We need 1231 for
our gaming chair, one for pillows, third
for the monitor, fourth for the keyboard, fifth for the mouse, six for what do you say
the keyboard mouse pad. Then you have for
the desktop PC, that would be 12345678,
Funko pops nine. For the form, we have ten, Let's add ten of them. 4,567,899.10 All right, I can add animation, but you wouldn't be able to
find the animation over here. What we'll need to do,
we'll just go to style. We'll go to hot spot. Under hot spot, you can see that no color has been associated. We'll have to choose
one bright color so that it is visible. I'm going to select
something like white. Would white be
visible? I think so. Or we could set this to
something like orange. Or we can add
another image also. First, let's just stick with this image and see whether
this works or not. First we have the white
hot spot. All right. We can use this
one or I could add something like an orange
one would Orange visible. Yeah. What happens if we
choose another color? I'm just trying to play around because the image itself has a lot of colors because it has an RGB strip in the background. There are a lot of colors
in the image itself. So it becomes really
difficult to add hot spot because then it wouldn't be very easy to identify from the
user's perspective. Let's try to give this
as a white hot spot. Now once I do this, I can just go to Image here under Hot
Spot, we have multiple ones. If I click on any one of the hot spot here,
I can add label. I can change the position of it. I can add a link as well. Which means if I add
label something like let's just say Gaming chair. You can see right here I have the label which is Gaming Chair. All right, now I can add a link so that whenever
someone clicks on it, they will be redirected to external link or internal link. I can add icon for this hotspot. Currently this hot spot
doesn't have any icon, but by just the icon
or uploading our own, you could set custom
size of this hot spot. You can change the height, you can change the width, or you could reset it back
by just toggling off. You can add content over here. There's a difference
between the label and the content here. If I have this as
the gaming chair, I can add something like
I can see the brand name. I can just add brand
name, Secret Lab, Gaming chair, white color. This is the product description. Now what happens if we
go to the style part? All right, here you
have tool tip also, which will just
cover in a moment. If I go to the style
tab under Hot Spot, I can change
different animations. I can change different
animations for hotspot. If someone hovers on it, do you want to display
the text of the hotspot or do you want it
to be clickable so you can choose between
different options? All right, let me just go to tool tip and see Trigger
is on click currently. If I set this to hover,
you'll find that. If I hover on the gaming chair, you'll find that Secret
Lab gaming chair White. Color is text is being shown
up right below our hot spot. Here you have the effect you can set the position
of the Tooltip, whether you want to
display the text of the content at the
top of your label, or at the bottom, or in
the right, or in the left. You can set it however you want. You can set the animation, whether you want
it to be fade in, fade out, You want
it to fade, grow. If I said this, you can see it. It appears like this. If
it's fade by direction, this is how it will come up. If it's slide by direction, you can see it slides
up and slides down. You can set the animation
duration as well. If I go to the style
under hot spot, I can the size of our
label, the hot spot. I can select the
minimum width and minimum height for our hot spot. It has some height. All right. You can add box color also. What does it mean if
I add some box color? You can see right here, if I have gaming chair
with some box color, you'll find that this is our
hot spot, this is our label. If I hover, that is when
you'll see the content fine. You can set the padding, you can adjust the border
radius for this. You could even add
box shadow for now. We don't want any box color, We'll just clear this out. We'll also set the size to
whatever it is right now. We'll go to here. You can change the
image settings to something like I
would like to drop down the transparency or
I would like to drop down where it is its
image CSS filters. I would like to drop
down the saturation to zero so that I would
get black and white image. Now over here, it would be easy to change the color of the
hot spot and the text itself. Right under tool tip, you can select the text color. If I set this to something like red, let's
see what happens. The content color, text
has been changed to red. I can set the typography. I can even change the alignment, and I can even add
some box fine, and I can change the
color of the box. Here you'll find that there
is some box for our content. This is what we want for the rest of the items.
Let's try and do it. I'll go here, back again. In the content for
this hot spot, the one which we have
for the gaming chair, I'll just remove the label, because we want just this
button to appear, right? This pulsating effect. Well, we'll change the position by just clicking on position
instead of content. And I can set the offset, whether I want it to be towards the right of the image
or towards the left. We want to display this right
above the gaming chair, right, or just on the
gaming chair. Fine. This is where we can set
the vertical orientation. Whether we want it to be top
or bottom, we can set this. But right now I would just
like to keep this as top. I can select the animation. I want the animation of this
hot spot to be of soft beat, expand overlay, or none. That will happen for the circle
that you have right here. Fine, let me just
go back to style. I'll change the hot spot
color to something like red, or let's just say
orange for that matter. Orange would look good. I think here we can add something
like a bright orange. Okay, let me go here. I'll select bright orange. Fine. Back here under hot spot, we'll select the item. We'll go on position
an animation would be set to expand, fine. Or we even said this
to soft beat, correct. You have sequenced animation
which means that you could, let's say you have
multiple animations going around for your hot spot. There is one, there's
two, there's three. Therefore, you can set this
in clockwise direction. First this animation
will pop up, then this hot spot will pop up. Then over here the hot spot
will pop up and so on. That's what sequence
animation is. Coming back to the
Tooltip part here, you can set the trigger on or click here you have the
animation for the content, for this hot spot
button over here, we can select the other things. Also if we want now for
the content that we have, you can see that it's
appearing outside our image. We don't want that to happen. What can we do in that case? Just drop down the size the circle hotspot wouldn't be visible. This is
the size of this. Coming to the part where we
want to change the text. For this text where it is appearing somewhat little
outside the hot spot, we'll need to go under Content Tooltip and change
the position instead of top. We can change this
to right here. It will appear
something like this. Fine, let me just make a
duplicate of the hot spot here. I have this one other one also, but I'll change the position. The other hot spot would appear just right here at
the monitor part. Fine, I will change the
content to something like External monitor, fine. External monitor just for this. For this we'll see the
gaming chair and so on. I can make this tool tip text to appear at the top if I want by just going
to the position. And I can set inside Tooltip,
I can set this to top. Here is how it will
display the text. You can do this for
all the other items. Also, you can just play around and see what
works best for you. This essentially can
come in handy when you are actually trying to showcase different features
of your product. Or just trying to showcase
the different offices and different location of your
shops across the entire world.
34. Do wonders with Elementor AI: Guys, the video that you all have been waiting
for is finally here. Let's see how we can make use of the element or I feature. Now, element or I
is currently in the beta mode at this point of time when
I'm recording this video, which basically means that not all the features will work. You can see right here
we have the beta, which basically means
that not all the features will be working perfectly fine. Some of it might work fine and some of it might
not just work. Nevertheless, elementor has
just released it for public, and they are charging
money for this. But we'll see, and we'll also see at the end that whether even if it's
worth it or not, because I know there are so many free AI tools
out there in the market. First of all, chat GPT has
dominated the AI market. Then we have Google's
powered, Microsoft's Bing. And I think Google is also
coming up with Mini, right? There are so many I elements
and tools out there. Now, how does AI of elementor stand out compared to
the other AI tools? So first and foremost
element or AI, helps in generating text, enabling us to add
animations to our elements, adding custom CSS, and then editing images and changing the background radient layouts. First let's click on the
Text editor right here. What I'll do is I'll just give specific prompts
to element or AI, so that it generates somebody
text for our website. Now we could do the
same thing with ChagBT, but what elementor says, it basically understands what
your website is all about. If you've just done added few
elements in your website, then it understands
the layout and it understands what
the content needs. That way it will give a
specific output for your needs. Let's go to Prost elementor.com and right here you would find a bunch
of different categories. Here you have specific
prompts for images, text code, and to
build containers. Let's go to Text
part right here. If I scroll down,
I'll see a part which says make a description
with three paragraphs. Now when I click on Copy prompt, I can just go back here and
under this text editor, I can just click on
Write It With AI. Now once I click here, you'll find that it
might take some time. And by the way,
this feature will only be accessible
to those who have connect their Google account or created their
account on Elementor, and they've connected
with the website. And you'll be given
free access to Element, or AI, for a limited
period of time. Once that time period runs out, you'll have to pay for
the subscription fee. Right here. I'll just
pace the prompt. Now, if you notice here, you'll see that the prompt
says, Make a decision for, in the square brackets,
you have the niche that the website is built for and that contains
three paragraphs. So let's go back here. I'll change this to, since you know that
the reason why we built this website was to
promote an application, a payment gateway application. We'll make a description for payment gateway application
for just like we can say like when more so that people
can pay internationally so that people can make
payments internationally and domestically without having or I could say very easily. All right. And that contains
only one paragraph, right? Let's generate the text. It might take some
time depending on the kind of content that
you want it to generate. Let's wait. And by the way, all the features
that you will use will consume few credits. I'm not quite sure
that how many credits would be allocated
for the free version, but you can just see right here, you'll find that it shows
up a really big paragraph. We can just click on this to make it shorter just because we want the content to fit
for our hero section. Still it is way too long. Let me just click it
again to make it shorter. All right, and here we have a payment gateway is a
secure and fast solution for Bo Domestic and all
these kinds of things. It's perfect choice
for individuals. If we can skip this line, I think till this point
it's good. Let's copy. Instead of copying and pasting, we can just delete
the last line. And we can just click on Us Text so that it will be
applied right here. All right, that is how
the text part works. Let's publish this website. Coming to the
buttons right here. Below this text, we have
two buttons, right? Let's see if we have any AI
features For the button, I'll just search code. Under code, I'll
search for button. All right, let me just search
for button. Let's go to. Page. Here you have this one. Buttons on, rotates
and text moves on how we can make use of this. Let's copy this prompt. I'll go back to my website. Now, since this Learn More
button doesn't have an icon, we'll just click over
here, icon library. And we can choose
any one of them. Since this is learn more, we can just click on arrow. We require an arrow, fine. I think this arrow
icon would look good. Let's insert this right here. Fine, this looks good. Now to use this prompt, we'll have to go to Advanced. Scroll down to the part
of custom CSS right here. You would find Edit with AI. Here we will paste the prompt. Fine, let's generate
the code for this. Now it will generate a CSS
code, which we will use it. We can change few things. If you are expert in CSS, fine. Here we have this thing. We can just click on Insert. Once we insert this,
let's see here. You can see this is how
cool our button looks. Let's publish this. All right, what other thing can
we do with this? Here we have image and
we have containers part. Right, Let's go down
and we'll try to manipulate our images and change the background
effect for this section. For this section,
as you can see, we have a background overlay. There is white color, and
there is green color. All right. Now this color
scheme goes in a gradient part. It has a linear gradient, I think, let me just
select this section here. I can go to style. Here you can see the
location for the first is 35% and the second is 100%
Let's try to change this. What can we do in this case? We can just search for
three ingredient fine. What essentially you'll
find is there are three colors and they will be
animated in the background. Let's copy the prompt. We'll
go here under Advanced. Under Advanced first we'll select custom CSS Edit with AI. Make sure you are selected the container, the
background container, the flex box layout, and paste the prompt. Let's enderate the CSS code within a matter of few seconds. We can just generate
the entire CSS code. Now you can find that it has been using some color by
default, we can change it. What color I have actually
selected is this. Let me just select this color. I'll paste it right here. Okay, I will just select
this part. I'll paste it. This is my second color. I'll paste this also,
the third color. Fine. Let's copy. We'll
paste it right here. Now if I published this, you would find it is making
use of the green colors. We can go to the style part, We can toggle this off. You would find that this is how the entire background works. Because we had the
gradient style, it was overlapping
with the custom CSS. That's why the animation and the gradient three radian color was not being that effective. But now you can see,
this is cool to see. Fine, let's go back here. Other things can be built, we can play around the images. Also, I have this, I could I could change this
image to something else. But let me just
scroll down or yeah, something around this part
where I have this guy's image. All right, I'll just
replace this guy's image with this image where
there is some background. And we'll try to remove the
background for this image. Under Choose image or
besides this choose image. We have Erit with AI here. I'm going to select this
and remove Background. Okay, I'll just click on it. Although there is a website
called This Removed Dog, where you can just
simply upload any of our images and the
background will be removed. It gives us pretty
accurate result. It is taking some
time and you can see it is very
accurate, I would say, simply because the background
for the image that we used was plain and it had some
solid background color. I'm not quite sure if
there would have been a few more images or objects in the background how well
it would have performed. But for now, let's
just try to use this image. Let's
see if it works. Obviously, it is going to use
this image in this section. This is how section looks like. All right, for the images part, we could even change
it to something else If I have an image
something like this. Let me just bring up a new
image, the product image. Let's try to make use of the
product image. Right here. Fine. Here I have this image. I can just choose this image. I can change the product itself. I could add variations. I can describe what variation or change I want in the product. I could say that the
image is of hair. Care. And so the
image image contains product images of hair conditioner soaps. We would like to
replace these products. Again, it is not showing
up many variations, I would say in terms of
variations of the image. It's not working that
great because I know and other tools like mid journey also very
at a beta stage. Obviously we cannot expect
wonders from element. Or let's leave this and we could replace this back with what we had used earlier,
which is the sky. Fine, what are we left with? Let's try to see
how we can generate a new container here. Instead of clicking on the plus where we have to build
the entire container and entire section from scratch or imputing a new template. Let's try to generate a
new section using AI Here, I could just click on
that AI button and it is asking us to enter few
suggested prompts. Now I want you to be
very specific about your prompts for now. I just written down
the entire prompt and I've divided my prompts
in terms of what layout, what kind of color
scheme I want to follow, what kind of typography
I want to follow, what kind of images
I would like, what kind of CTA actions
and CTA elements I want, what kind of animations
I would like, what kind of brand I want
to showcase to my visitors. All these kinds of things I've actually written down already. You can just take help of Cha GPT and come up
with a prompt that help us building prompts
for Element or AI to create a new container. Let's just say a
product company, fine that you're building a hero section, that's
what you can enter. I'll just paste
the entire prompt, and I will click on Generate. Let's see what kind of
container it shows up, because I think design
is very visual. You cannot explain it
in terms of words. That's why products like
Dvd and Figma exist. And they have
collaborative features so that people can
work collaboratively instead of typing in and explaining what kind of work
you expect from each other. Here you can see it is showing
up very, very basic stuff. There are two containers.
The one has the entire text. In terms of text, I have no
doubt it will excel because St GBD itself and the
GBT model itself, it is very great
in terms of text, but in terms of images and in terms of the
animation and layout, it is not, it's not providing
any accurate results. We could just delete this part or what the better way
would be to import any of the premate templates
either from theme forest or making use of the
elementor pro templates. I hope you guys
enjoyed this lecture. There are many other things that element could
improve in terms of AI. Let's see if in future
they could improve and roll out the proper
version of element. Or I for public.
35. That's a Wrap - Ending Notes: Guys. Now before we
end this course, I would just like
to discuss a few of the things that we
might have missed. Right here, I'm on my
Wortress dashboard and under Elementor we have
something called As Tools. When we go right here,
you'll find under general tabs that there is
something called a safe mode. Now this can come in handy when, let's just say that you're
using a few of the plug ins, or maybe you have imported a theme from theme
for us or any of the theme marketplaces
and your website breaks in order to
debug the problems. You could just enable the
safe mode using which you'll identify which particular plug in or what exactly is causing
your website to break, and then you can debug. So that's one important
aspect to using safe mode. Then coming to the
version control part, here you can roll back to any of the previous versions
of element or by just selecting
any of the versions and clicking on the
reinstall button. All right, then here you
have the maintenance mode. Now let's just say
that once you upload or transfer this website from your local system to
your hosting provider, then then you decide, let's just say that you want to update your website or
a few of the web pages, then it wouldn't be a good experience
that the visitors in your website and in that particular moment you're parallel updating the website. Then in that case,
what you can do, you can just select
the maintenance mode in something called
as maintenance. Or coming soon, coming soon could come in handy
when you're actually included a web page in your menu bar itself or navigation
bar, or in your header. I would say that page itself is not live completely
like in my website. Here I have. Let me just show
you what I mean by that. Here I have something
called as Blocks page. If I go right here, you'll find that there
is one coming soon page because I haven't published
any of the blocks. Something like that you can do by just selecting coming soon. Or you could just toggle
to maintenance mode, which basically means that
whenever someone visits your URL while you're
updating the website, they will see that the
website is under maintenance. And you can create the
custom theme and design using the element
or theme builder. And you can choose
the different pages design layout for
maintenance or coming soon. If I select maintenance mode, you'll see choose the
particular template. Now if you have saved any template for the
maintenance mode, that would pop up right here in the menu and you'll
be able to select it. All right, here you have
an option to import or export any of the kit,
which basically means that, let's just say you
have downloaded any of the theme
element or theme from theme for or any of the
theme marketplaces, you can import them. Or if you would like to sell your own theme which you
built using the element or Pro elements and you
want to start making money as a freelancer and
sell your digital assets. Then you can export
your entire theme and sell it on any
of the marketplaces. All right, here you
have users section. You can add multiple users. So if you can see there are multiple user roles
like subscriber, contributor, author,
editor, administrator. As of now, we are administrator, which means we have
access to all the things that we can do in
our press website. If you create a new subscriber, it basically means
that they will be able to read the post and
comment on your blog post. If you've given someone
as a contributor role, then they can edit
and delete the post. That means, let's just say that you have your
company website or you have your own personal
portfolio website and you have published blogs, but you have a copywriter with
you and you've given them the contributor access
so that they can edit the content of your post
or maybe even delete it. If it's not up to the mark, you have an option to give
someone author access, which basically means that
they can publish their post, they can upload files
to the media library. Let's just say that
instead of an editor where editor basically
means they're contributor, let's say you have
a copywriter person with you in your team whose job is to just edit
your block post and not create and delete and
add content to it. You should give
them contributor, but if you have a
copywriter along with you, you should give
them author access so that they can write, publish, upload media and other images, videos, whatever it's
appropriate for the block post. Then you have an editor access. With editor access,
what the person can do is that they can manage
categories inside block post. They can moderate the comments, then they can even it and delete any of the
post or a web page. This is another important
thing because here you have given them the access
of your web page also, which is different
than your block post. This becomes like
a full time job wherein they have an
access to the block post. Now this editor access
comes in handy when you're handing over the entire web design project
to your client. That though, they don't
manipulate the plugins or remove the users or
edit the theme itself, which could cause some
website breaking issues. It's perfect to give them the editor access and you should keep the administrator
access by yourself. So here to give
any of your user, let's just say a
subscriber access, let's try to give a user name. I'm going to give this
something like an editor. I'll write an e mail. Let me just include
any of the e mail. So here I have the e mail. I can write the first name, last name, and here I can
change the password if I like. Let me just put something
like a very simple password and I can just enable or
disable this notification bar. Since this is my own e mail ID. I know that I've been
given the editor access, so I'll just untak this. And here I can choose
the different role. Let me just give this as a subscriber role and
I will add a new user. All right. Now, let
me just log out and I will log in with
a different user, which is the editor access or subscriber access, I should say. So here you can see I've logged in using the Editor Access. Right here you can
see Editor Access. So in my dashboard itself, I just have only one option, profile collapse menu, And
I can go to dashboard. All right, so if I go
to a press website, I can select any
of the block post. And here I just have access to read and add comments
to my block post, which is very similar to any of the user who don't have any of the access
to your website. They can even do the same,
They can read the block post and they can leave
comments inside your post. But just the difference is that whenever someone is
leaving any comment, they need to login
to your website. So that's what you
have done by giving someone as a subscriber
access. All right. So I hope you guys get the
point and congratulations. Hereby we end this
entire course. Seriously. Did you know that only 10% of the students make
it past the first module? This means that you
are literally one of the top students who have
ever taken this course. And there are only two
things for you to do now. First one is to take action. Today, I know it's going to
sound a little bit cliche, but it's a fact that the journey on 1,000 miles begin
with a single step. Start by building
a simple website. It doesn't matter if you
can't do everything today, but just get started at least. All right, second, I
need your feedback. Take 30 seconds of
your time to leave your honest feedback about this course here
on the platform. And myself, as well as
hundreds of other students, will be in your gratitude. So I'm so excited to see how this course will positively
impact the rest of your life. So be sure to keep me
posted on your results. I'm looking forward to your
success. Take care. Bye bye.